Pioneer CRB2619 AU If Not Then AVIC Z3 Operation Manual0218

User Manual: Pioneer If not then Manual: ://www.pioneerelectronics.com/StaticFiles/Manuals/Navigation/AVIC-Z3_OperationManual0218

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 211

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Operation Manual
HDD MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION SERVER

AVIC-Z3
Notice to all users:
This software requires that the navigation system is
properly connected to your vehicle’s parking brake and
depending on your vehicle, additional installation may
be required. For more information, please contact your
Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at
(800) 421-1404.

English

Contents

! The screens shown in the examples may
differ from the actual screens.
! The actual screens may be changed without notice for performance and function
improvements.
Introduction
Manual Overview 8
– How to use this manual 8
– Overview for each chapter 8
– Terminology 10
– About the definition of terminology 10
– Color difference of the map display
between day and night 10
License Agreement 11
– PIONEER AVIC-Z3 - for U.S.A. 11
– PIONEER AVIC-Z3 - for Canada 13
– Terms and Conditions for the Tele Atlas
Data 15
– About the Data for the Map
Database 18
– Copyright 18
– About Gracenote® 19
Before Using the System
Important Safety Information 21
Additional Safety Information 22
– To ensure safe driving 22
Features (Characteristics of this
software) 22
– About XM NavTraffic Service and
Pioneer Navigation 24
Notes for Hard Disk Drive 24
– Recording equipment and
copyright 24
– Notes when writing data to the hard
disk drive at low temperature 24

– Points about recording 24
– Data saved or recorded by the
customer 25
– Failure to operate 25
Visit Our Web site 25
Basic Operation
Flow from Startup to Termination 26
How to Use Navigation Menu Screens 26
– Displaying the Navigation menu 26
– Navigation menu overview 27
Basic Navigation 28
– Basic flow of operation 28
– Calculating your destination by using
Address Search 28
– Checking and modifying the route 32
– When the route guidance starts 33
Canceling the Route Guidance 33
Modifying the Route Calculation
Conditions 34
– Items that users can operate 34
Checking the Current Route 35
– Checking the passing streets with a
list 35
– Checking the entire route overview on
the map 36
Editing Waypoints 36
– Adding a waypoint 36
– Deleting a waypoint 37
– Sorting waypoints 37
– Skipping a waypoint 37
How to Read the Map Display
How to Use the Map 38
– Switching the view mode 38
– How to view the map of the current
location 38
– Roads without turn-by-turn
instructions 43
– Changing the scale of the map 43

Contents

– Scroll the map to the location you want
to see 43
– Shortcut menu 45
Modifying Map Configurations
Entering the Map Menu 46
Setting the Item on the Map Screen 46
Selecting the Shortcut 48
Displaying POI on the Map 49
Viewing the Map Color Legend 49
Changing the View Mode for the Navigation
Map 49
Setting the Map Color Change between Day
and Night 50
Changing the Setting of Navigation
Interruption Screen 50
Changing the Map Color 50
Setting a Route to Your Destination
Searching for Points of Interest (POI)
Statewide 51
– Searching for a POI directly from the
name of the facilities 51
– Searching for POIs by specifying a
category first 52
– Searching for POIs by specifying a city
name first 53
Finding a POI in the Vicinity 53
– Searching for the facilities around the
current position 53
– Searching for the facilities around the
scroll cursor 54
Searching for Your Destination by Specifying
the Telephone Number 55
Route Calculation to Your Home Location or
to Your Favorite Location 55
Selecting Destination from “Destination
History” and “Address Book” 56
Registering/deleting POI Shortcuts 56
– Registering a POI shortcut 56

– Deleting a POI shortcut 57
Registering and Editing Locations
Registering Locations Overview 58
Registering your home and your favorite
location 58
Registering a Location into “Address
Book” 59
– Registering a location by scroll
mode 59
– Registering a location by “Address
Book” 59
– Viewing “Address Book” 60
– Editing the entry in “Address Book” 60
– Deleting the entry in “Address
Book” 63
Operating “Destination History” 64
– Deleting the entry in “Destination
History” 64
Using Traffic Information
Using XM NavTraffic Information 65
– Viewing traffic list 65
– Confirming traffic information on the
map 66
– Setting an alternative route to avoid
traffic congestion 67
– Selecting traffic information to
display 69
Using XM Tuner and Other Information
Using the XM Tuner to View Stock, Sports,
and Other Information 70
– Displaying stock prices 70
– Storing browsable information 70
– Displaying favorite browsable
Information 71
Checking the Reception Status of the XM
Tuner 72
Emergency Info 72
En

Contents

– Checking the information registered as
Emergency Info 73
– Searching for car service in an
emergency 74
– Registering user information 75
Setting the Vehicle Dynamics Display 76
Using Hands-free Phoning
Hands-free Phoning Overview 77
– Preparing communication devices 77
– Setting up for hands-free phoning 78
– Receiving a phone call 80
– Making a phone call 81
– Transferring the phone book 83
– Registering a phone number in “Dial
Favorites” 84
– Editing the entry in “Phone Book” 84
– Editing the received call or dialed
number history 86
Modifying the General Settings for
Navigation Functions
Entering the Settings Menu 88
Setting the Volume for Guidance and
Phone 88
Customizing the Regional Settings 88
– Changing the language for navigation
guidance and menu 88
– Setting the time difference 89
– Customizing the keyboard layout 89
– Changing the unit between km and
miles 89
– Changing the virtual speed of the
vehicle 90
Checking the Setting Related with
Hardware 90
– Checking the connections of leads and
installation positions 90
– Checking sensor learning status and
driving status 91

– Correcting the installation angle 92
– Checking the device and version
information 92
– Checking the hard disk
information 92
Registering the Home Location and Favorite
Location 93
Changing the Background Picture 93
– Limitations for importing pictures 94
– Precautions when changing the Splash
Screen 95
Using the Demonstration Guidance 95
Correcting the Current Location 95
Restoring the Default Setting 96
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive
and Radio)
Basic Operation 97
– Switching the Audio operation
screen 97
– Selecting a source 97
– About Steering Remote Control 98
– Viewing the audio operation screen and
displaying the Audio Settings
menu 99
Operating a Music CD 99
– Selecting [CD] as the source 99
– About auto hard disk recording 100
– Screen configuration 100
– Touch panel key operation 101
Operating the CD-ROM (MP3 disc) 101
– Selecting [ROM] as the source 102
– Screen configuration 102
– Touch panel key operation 102
– Notes on playing MP3 disc 104
Operating the DVD 104
– Selecting [DVD] as the source 104
– Screen configuration 104
– Touch panel key operation 105

Contents

– Searching for a desired scene, starting
playback from a specified time 106
– Entering the numerical
commands 106
Operating the Radio (FM) 107
– Selecting [FM] as the source 107
– Screen configuration 107
Touch panel key operation 107
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies 108
Tuning in strong signals 108
Operating the Radio (AM) 108
– Selecting [AM] as the source 108
– Screen configuration 108
– Touch panel key operation 108
– Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies 109
– Tuning in strong signals 109

Selecting [XM] as the source 123
– Screen configuration 123
– Touch panel key operation 124
– Display the Radio ID 125
– Selecting a channel from the XM
channel list display 125
– Using “My Mix” function 126
– Using the direct traffic announcement
function 127
Operating the SIRIUS Satellite Radio 127
– Selecting [SIRIUS] as the source 128
– Touch panel key operation 128
– Selecting teams for Game Alert 129
– Displaying game information (Game
Info) 130
– Using “My Mix” function 130
– Using the Traffic & Weather preset
function 132

Using the AV Source (Music Library)
Music Library Recording 110
– Recording all tracks in a CD 111
– Recording a CD manually 111
– Recording only the first track of a
CD 111
– Stopping CD recording 111
– Notes on CD recording 112
Music Library Play 112
– Selecting [LIBRARY] as the
source 112
– Screen configuration 112
– Touch panel key operation 113
– Creating a playlist with a customized
order 116
– Editing a playlist or tracks 117
– Assigning another candidate for title
information 122

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)
Operating the Multi-CD Player 133
– Selecting [M-CD] as the source 133
– Screen configuration 133
– Touch panel key operation 133
Operating the iPod® 134
– Selecting [iPod] as the source 134
– Screen configuration 135
– Touch panel key operation 135
– Browsing for a song 136
Operating the TV tuner 136
– Selecting [TV] as the source 136
– Screen configuration 137
– Touch panel key operation 137
– Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies 137
– Storing the strongest broadcast
stations sequentially 138

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)
Operating the XM Satellite Radio 123

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)
Operating the AV Input source 139
En

Contents

– Selecting [AV INPUT] as the
source 139
Operating the External Unit 139
– Selecting [EXT 1] or [EXT 2] as the
source 139
– Screen configuration 139
– Touch panel key operation 139
– Operate the external unit by using 1 key
— 6 key 140
– Operate the external unit by using
Function 1 — Function 4 140
– Switching the automatic and manual
function 140
Operating the AUX input source (AUX) 141
– Selecting [AUX] as the source 141
Customizing the Audio Setting related
with Audio Visual
AV Setting Overview 142
– How to Operate the Audio Settings
screen 142
Customizing the Audio Settings Items 142
– Using the equalizer 142
– Setting the simulated sound
stage 144
– Using balance adjustment 144
– Using subwoofer output 145
– Using non fading output 145
– Adjusting loudness 145
– Using the high pass filter 146
– Adjusting source levels 146
Customizing the System Settings Items 146
– How to view and operate the System
Settings 146
– Setting up the built-in DVD drive 147
– Setting the parental lock 148
– Changing the wide screen mode 149
– Setting for rear view camera 149
– Setting the video input 150
– Switching the auxiliary setting 150

– Switching the muting/attenuation
timing 150
– Switching the muting/attenuation
level 151
– Changing the voice output of the
navigation guidance 151
– Switching the auto antenna
setting 151
– Setting the clock display on the video
image 151
– Setting the CD recording mode 152
– Setting the rear output and subwoofer
controller 152
– Switching the 5.1ch setting 152
Other Functions 153
– Selecting the video for “Rear
display” 153
– Operating the picture adjustment 153
– Switching the backlight on or off 154
Language Code Chart for DVD 155
Operating Your Navigation System with
Voice
To Ensure Safe Driving 156
Basics of Voice Operation 156
– Flow of voice operation 156
– To start voice operation 156
Tips for Voice Operation 157
An Example of Voice Operation 158
– Search for POI in vicinity 158
– Search for the playlist 159
Available Voice Commands 159
– Basic commands for voice
operation 161
– Voice commands related to
navigation 161
– Voice commands related to hands-free
phoning 164
– Voice commands related to AV
operation 165

Contents

– After checking traffic information
manually 167
– Location screen (A) and (B) 167
Other Voice Commands 168
– Other voice commands for navigation
operation 168
– Other voice commands for AV
operation 170
– Category list for vicinity search 172
Appendix
Troubleshooting 174
Messages and How to React to Them 179
Messages for Audio Functions 184
Returning the Navigation System to the
Default or Factory Settings 187
– Setting items to be deleted 188
– If system errors frequently occur 190
– Completely returning the navigation
system to the initial state 190
Adjusting the Response Positions of the
Touch Panels (Touch Panel
Calibration) 190
Positioning Technology 191
– Positioning by GPS 191
– Positioning by dead reckoning 192
– How do GPS and dead reckoning work
together? 192
Handling Large Errors 193
– When the positioning by GPS is
impossible 193
Vehicles that Cannot Obtain Speed Pulse
Data 194
Conditions Likely to Cause Noticeable
Positioning Errors 194
When the Hard Disk Drive is
Disconnected 197
Route Setting Information 197
– Route search specifications 197
Detail Information for Playable Media 199

– DVD discs and other DVD media
types 199
– About playing DualDisc 199
– CD-R/CD-RW discs 199
– MP3 files 200
Display Information 202
– Navigation menu 202
– Shortcut menu 203
Menu in the Audio Screen 204
Glossary 205
Index 209

Chapter

Introduction
Manual Overview
This manual provides important information
you need to make full use of your new navigation system. The beginning sections outline
the navigation system and describe its basic
operation. The later sections describe the details of the navigation functions.
Chapter 12 to Chapter 17 describe how to operate the AV functions. Please read these
chapters when you use a disc in the built-in
DVD drive or operate the Pioneer audio equipment connected to the navigation system.

How to use this manual
Be sure to read the following
descriptions
! License Agreement (= Refer to License
Agreement on page 11)
This provides a license agreement of this
software. Be sure to read this before using
the software.
! About the Data for the Map Database
(= Refer to About the Data for the Map
Database on page 18)
This provides the date when the Map Database was recorded.
! Copyright (= Refer to Copyright on
page 18)
This provides the copyright of the Map Database.
! About Gracenote® (= Refer to About
Gracenote® on page 19)
This provides a license agreement and
copyright of the Gracenote® music recognition service. Be sure to read this before
using this navigation system.
Finding the operation procedure from
what you want to do
When you have decided what you want to do,
you can find the page you need from the
“Contents”.

Finding the operation procedure from
a menu name
If you want to check the meaning of each item
displayed on the screen, you will find the necessary page from the “Display Information” at
the end of the manual.
Glossary
See the glossary to find the meaning of a
term.
Index
The section at the end of this manual provides
an index. See each term to find the main
pages where it is stated.

Overview for each chapter
2 Before Using the System
For safety reasons, it is particularly important that you fully understand your
navigation system before using it. Be
sure to read this chapter.
3 Basic Operation
Please read this section if you want to
operate the navigation system immediately. It will explain the basics of this
system.
This section describes the basic operations for navigation.
4 How to Read the Map Display
This section describes how to read the map
screen, and the method of changing map
view or map scale.
5 Modifying Map Configurations
The behavior of your navigation system depends on the map display and guidance settings. If you need to change any of the
current settings, read the relevant section of
this chapter.

Chapter

Introduction

7 Registering and Editing Locations
You can register and edit the points on the
map. This chapter describes how to register
a home location, favorite location or other
location, and how to edit the entry in “Address Book”.
8 Using Traffic Information
When Pioneer XM satellite radio tuner (GEXP10XMT) is connected to the navigation system, the system can acquire traffic information and perform navigation using the traffic
information. This chapter describes ways of
viewing traffic icons that are displayed on
the map and operation related traffic information.
9 Using XM Tuner and Other Information
When Pioneer XM satellite radio tuner (GEXP10XMT) is connected to the navigation system, variety of information other than traffic
can be acquired. The navigation system can
also register emergency information. This
chapter describes ways of the information
acquired with XM satellite radio, registration
of emergency information.
a Using Hands-free Phoning
When you are using a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth® technology by connecting
the Bluetooth unit (sold separately) to the
navigation system, you can operate your cellular phone hands-free. This chapter describes the operations related to hands-free
phoning.
b Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions
The behavior of your navigation system depends a number of general settings for navigation functions. If you need to change any

of the initial settings (default settings), read
the relevant section of this chapter.
c Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive
and Radio)
This section describes how to use DVD-Videos, CDs, MP3, discs and the radio.

Introduction

6 Setting a Route to Your Destination
This section describes various ways to
search for a destination, edit the current
route conditions and operate the route during route guidance.

d Using the AV Source (Music Library)
You can record a music CD to the hard disk
drive in the navigation system. This chapter
describes recording music and playing back
the recorded music.
e Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)
This chapter describes the audio source operations that can be used when an XM satellite radio tuner or SiriusConnect universal
tuner is connected.
f Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)
This chapter describes the audio source operations that can be used when Pioneer
audio equipment featuring IP-BUS (MultiCD player, Interface adapter for iPod, TV
tuner) is connected.
g Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)
This chapter describes the audio source operations that can be used when connecting
AV equipment with an RCA connector (AV
input), future Pioneer devices (external
unit), or auxiliary equipment (AUX).
h Customizing the Audio Setting related
with Audio Visual
Using the audio source, various audio-visual
settings are available to suit your tastes.
This chapter describes how to change the
settings.
i Operating Your Navigation System
with Voice
This section describes navigation operations, such as searching the destination
and performing audio operations by voice.

Chapter

Introduction
j Appendix
Please read the appendix to learn more
about your navigation system and information such as the availability of after-care.
Please see “Display Information” at the end
of this manual to check the details for each
item on the menu.

Terminology
Before moving on, take a few minutes to read
the following information about the conventions used in this manual. They will help you
greatly as you learn how to use your new
equipment.
! Hardware buttons on your navigation system are described in ALL CAPITAL,
BOLD lettering:
e.g.)
MENU button, MAP button.
! Items in the different menus or touch panel
keys available on the screen are described
in brackets [ ] and bold:
e.g.)
[Destination], [Settings].
! Extra information, alternative usages and
other notes are presented like this:
e.g.)
p Touch panel keys which are not available at this time are grayed out.
! References to sections that describe information related to the current topics are indicated like this:
e.g.)
= For details, refer to Modifying the Route
Calculation Conditions on page 34

About the definition of
terminology
“Front Display” and “Rear Display”
In this manual, the screen that is attached to
the body of this navigation unit will be referred
to as the “Front Display”. Any additional optional screen that is purchased for use in con-

junction with this navigation unit will be
referred to as the “Rear Display”.
“Video image”
“Video image” in this manual indicates the
moving image from DVD-Video in the built-in
DVD drive or from the equipment that is connected to this system with an AV-BUS or RCA
cable, such as a TV tuner or general-purpose
AV equipment.

Color difference of the map
display between day and night

Night display

The examples in this manual are illustrated
using the daytime display. When driving at
night, the colors you see may differ from those
shown.

Chapter

Introduction

01
of the Software by reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation, or any other
means. You shall not use the Software to operate a service bureau or for any other use
involving the processing of data for other
persons or entities.
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all
copyright, trade secret, patent and other
proprietary ownership rights in the Software. The Software is copyrighted and may
not be copied, even if modified or merged
with other products. You shall not alter or remove any copyright notice or proprietary legend contained in or on the Software.
You may transfer all of your license rights in
the Software, the related documentation
and a copy of this License Agreement to another party, provided that the party reads
and agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this License Agreement.

PIONEER AVIC-Z3 - for U.S.A.
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN
YOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER
ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. (“PIONEER”).
PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON
THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY USING THE
SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER
PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY
THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED BY
THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER( S) (“SUPPLIERS”),
AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COVERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’ SEPARATE
TERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS
AGREEMENT (Refer to page 15). IF YOU DO
NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE TERMS,
PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRODUCTS
(INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND ANY
WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5) DAYS
OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO THE
AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM
WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF
THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE
YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREEMENT.
1

GRANT OF LICENSE
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable,
non exclusive license to use the software installed on the Pioneer products (the “Software”) and the related documentation solely
for your own personal use or for internal
use by your business, only on such Pioneer
products.
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate, port, modify or make derivative works
of the Software. You shall not loan, rent, disclose, publish, sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market or otherwise transfer the
Software or use it in any manner not expressly authorized by this agreement. You
shall not derive or attempt to derive the
source code or structure of all or any portion

Introduction

License Agreement

Chapter

Introduction

01
3

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS INCURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST
PROFITS, LOST INCOME, LOST SALES OR
BUSINESS, EXPENDITURES, INVESTMENTS, OR COMMITMENTS IN CONNECTION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS OF ANY
GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULTING
FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS
BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR
SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES
OF ACTION INDIVIDUALLY OR IN THE AGGREGATE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF
WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, MISREPRESENTATION, AND OTHER
TORTS. IF PIONEER’S WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET
FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT SHALL OR
FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER BE HELD
UNENFORCEABLE OR INAPPLICABLE,
YOU AGREE THAT PIONEER’S LIABILITY
SHALL NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT (50%)
OF THE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIONEER PRODUCT.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion
may not apply to you. This warranty disclaimer and limitation of liability shall not be
applicable to the extent that they are prohibited by any applicable federal, state or local
law which provides that such a disclaimer
or limitation cannot be waived or preempted.
EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES
You agree and certify that neither the Software nor any other technical data received
from Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof,

will be exported outside the United States
except as authorized and as permitted by
the laws and regulations of the United
States. If the Software has been rightfully
obtained by you outside of the United
States, you agree that you will not re-export
the Software nor any other technical data received from Pioneer, nor the direct product
thereof, except as permitted by the laws and
regulations of the United States and the
laws and regulations of the jurisdiction in
which you obtained the Software.
5

TERMINATION
This Agreement is effective until terminated.
You may terminate it at any time by destroying the Software. The Agreement also will
terminate if you do not comply with any
terms or conditions of this Agreement.
Upon such termination, you agree to destroy the Software.

U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS
If the Software is being acquired by or on
behalf of the United States government or
any other entity seeking or applying rights
similar to those customarily claimed by the
United States government, the Data is licensed with “Limited Rights”. Utilization of
the Software is subject to the restrictions
specified in the “Rights in Technical Data”
clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, or the
equivalent clause for non-defense agencies.
Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc., 2265 East
220th Street, Long Beach, CA 90810.

Chapter

Introduction
MISCELLANEOUS
This is the entire Agreement between
Pioneer and you regarding its subject matter. No change in this Agreement shall be effective unless agreed to in writing by
Pioneer. Pioneer retailers do not have the
authority to change this Agreement. This
Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the internal laws
of the State of California. If any provision of
this Agreement is declared invalid or unenforceable, the remaining provisions of this
Agreement shall remain in full force and effect.

PIONEER AVIC-Z3 - for Canada
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN
YOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER
ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
(“PIONEER”). PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND
CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY
USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE
PIONEER PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE
BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER
(S) (“SUPPLIERS”), AND YOUR USE OF THE
DATABASE IS COVERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’
SEPARATE TERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHED
TO THIS AGREEMENT (Refer to page 15). IF
YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE
TERMS, PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRODUCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND
ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5)
DAYS OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO
THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM
WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF
THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE
YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREEMENT.
1

stalled on the Pioneer products (the “Software”) and the related documentation solely
for your own personal use or for internal
use by your business, only on such Pioneer
products.
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate, port, modify or make derivative works
of the Software. You shall not loan, rent, disclose, publish, sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market or otherwise transfer the
Software or use it in any manner not expressly authorized by this agreement. You
shall not derive or attempt to derive the
source code or structure of all or any portion
of the Software by reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation, or any other
means. You shall not use the Software to operate a service bureau or for any other use
involving the processing of data for other
persons or entities.
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all
copyright, trade secret, patent and other
proprietary ownership rights in the Software. The Software is copyrighted and may
not be copied, even if modified or merged
with other products. You shall not alter or remove any copyright notice or proprietary legend contained in or on the Software.
You may transfer all of your license rights in
the Software, the related documentation
and a copy of this License Agreement to another party, provided that the party reads
and agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this License Agreement.

Introduction

GRANT OF LICENSE
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable,
nonexclusive license to use the software in-

Chapter

Introduction

01
2

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
The Software and related documentation
are provided to you “AS IS”. PIONEER AND
ITS LICENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2 and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s)
shall be collectively referred to as “Pioneer”)
MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY
FOR THE SOFTWARE, WHETHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, AND ALL WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOME
STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. The
Software is complex and may contain some
nonconformities, defects or errors. Pioneer
does not warrant that the Software will meet
your needs or expectations, that operation
of the Software will be error free or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities can or
will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer does
not make any representations or warranties
regarding the use or results of the use of
the Software in terms of its accuracy, reliability or otherwise.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS INCURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST
PROFITS, LOST INCOME, LOST SALES OR
BUSINESS, EXPENDITURES, INVESTMENTS, OR COMMITMENTS IN CONNECTION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS OF ANY
GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULTING
FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS
BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR
SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES
OF ACTION INDIVIDUALLY OR IN THE AGGREGATE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITA-

TION BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF
WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, MISREPRESENTATION, AND OTHER
TORTS. IF PIONEER’S WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET
FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT SHALL OR
FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER BE HELD
UNENFORCEABLE OR INAPPLICABLE,
YOU AGREE THAT PIONEER’S LIABILITY
SHALL NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT (50%)
OF THE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIONEER PRODUCT.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion
may not apply to you. This warranty disclaimer and limitation of liability shall not be
applicable to the extent that they are prohibited by any applicable federal, state or local
law which provides that such a disclaimer
or limitation cannot be waived or preempted.
4

EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES
You agree and certify that neither the Software nor any other technical data received
from Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof,
will be exported outside Canada except as
authorized and as permitted by the laws and
regulations of Canada. If the Software has
been rightfully obtained by you outside of
Canada, you agree that you will not re-export
the Software nor any other technical data received from Pioneer, nor the direct product
thereof, except as permitted by the laws and
regulations of Canada and the laws and regulations of the jurisdiction in which you obtained the Software.

Chapter

Introduction
MISCELLANEOUS
This is the entire Agreement between
Pioneer and you regarding its subject matter. No change in this Agreement shall be effective unless agreed to in writing by
Pioneer. Pioneer retailers do not have the
authority to change this Agreement. This
Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the internal laws
of the Province of Ontario and the federal
laws of Canada applicable therein. If any
provision of this Agreement is declared invalid or unenforceable, the remaining provisions of this Agreement shall remain in full
force and effect.

Terms and Conditions for the
Tele Atlas Data
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT (THE “AGREEMENT”) BETWEEN YOU, THE END USER, AND
TELE ATLAS NORTH AMERICA, INC. (“Tele
Atlas”). BY USING YOUR COPY OF THE TELE
ATLAS DATA, YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
1

Grant of License.
Tele Atlas grants you a non-transferable,
non-exclusive license to use the map data
and business points of interest information
(the “POIs”), (together, the “Data”) contained
on these discs, solely for personal, non-commercial use and not to operate a service bureau or for any other use involving the
processing of data of other persons or entities. You may make one (1) copy of the Data
for archival or backup purposes only but
you may not otherwise copy, reproduce,
modify, make derivative works, derive the
structure of or reverse engineer the Data.
The Data contains confidential and proprietary information and materials, and may
contain trade secrets, so you agree to hold
the Data in confidence and in trust and not
to disclose the Data or any portions in any
form, including by renting, leasing, publishing, leasing, sublicensing or transferring the
Data to any third party. You are prohibited
from removing or obscuring any copyright,
trademark notice or restrictive legend.

Ownership.
The Data is copyrighted by Tele Atlas and its
licensors and they retain all ownership
rights in the Data. You agree not to alter, remove, obliterate, or obscure any copyright
notice or proprietary legend contained in or
on the Data.

Introduction

Chapter

Introduction

Warranty Disclaimer.
THE DATA IS PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS”
AND “WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS” AND TELE
ATLAS AND ITS SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, ACCURACY, TITLE AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
NO ORAL OR WRITTEN ADVICE OR INFORMATION PROVIDED BY TELE ATLAS OR
ANY OF ITS AGENTS, EMPLOYEES OR
THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS SHALL CREATE
A WARRANTY, AND YOU ARE NOT ENTITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCH ADVICE OR
INFORMATION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF
WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL CONDITION OF THE AGREEMENT.

Limitation of Liability.
TELE ATLAS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR
COSTS OF COVER, LOSS OF USE OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER YOU WERE
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY CONTAINED
HEREIN, TELE ATLAS SHALL HAVE NO
MONETARY LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ANY
CAUSE (REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF
ACTION) UNDER OR RELATING TO THIS
AGREEMENT.

Termination.
This Agreement will terminate immediately
and automatically, without notice, if you
breach any term of this Agreement. You
agree that in the event of termination of the
Agreement, you shall return the Data (including all documentation and all copies) to
Tele Atlas and its suppliers.

Indemnity.
You agree to indemnify, defend and hold
Tele Atlas, its Licensors, and its Suppliers
(including their respective licensors, suppliers, assignees, subsidiaries, affiliated companies, and the respective officers,
directors, employees, shareholders, agents
and representatives) free and harmless from
and against any liability, loss, injury (including injuries resulting in death), demand, action, cost, expense, or claim of any kind or
character, including but not limited to attorney's fees, arising out of or in connection
with any use or possession by you of the
Data.

Chapter

Introduction
U.S. Government Rights.
If you are an agency, department, or other
entity of the United States Government, or
funded in whole or in part by the United
States Government, then use, duplication,
reproduction, release, modification, disclosure or transfer of this commercial product
and accompanying documentation, is restricted in accordance with the LIMITED or
RESTRICTED rights as described in DFARS
252.227-7014(a)(1) (JUN 1995) (DOD commercial computer software definition),
DFARS 227.7202-1 (DOD policy on commercial computer software), FAR 52.227-19
(JUN 1987) (commercial computer software
clause for civilian agencies), DFARS
252.227-7015 (NOV 1995) (DOD technical
data – commercial items clause); FAR
52.227-14 Alternates I, II, and III (JUN 1987)
(civilian agency technical data and noncommercial computer software clause); and/or
FAR 12.211 and FAR 12.212 (commercial
item acquisitions), as applicable. In case of
conflict between any of the FAR and DFARS
provisions listed herein and this License,
the construction that provides greater limitations on the Government’s rights shall
control. Contractor/manufacturer is Tele
Atlas North America, Inc., 11 Lafayette
Street, Lebanon, NH 03766-1445. Phone:
603.643. 0330. The Data is ©1984-2007 by
Tele Atlas. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. For purpose of any public disclosure provision
under any federal, state or local law, it is
agreed that the Data is a trade secret and a
proprietary commercial product and not
subject to disclosure.
If you are an agency, department, or other
entity of any State government, the United
States Government or any other public entity or funded in whole or in part by the United States Government, then you hereby
agree to protect the Data from public disclosure and to consider the Data exempt from
any statute, law, regulation, or code, includ-

ing any Sunshine Act, Public Records Act,
Freedom of Information Act, or equivalent,
which permits public access and/or reproduction or use of the Data. In the event that
such exemption is challenged under any
such laws, this Agreement shall be considered breached and any and all right to retain
any copies or to use of the Data shall be terminated and considered immediately null
and void. Any copies of the Data held by you
shall immediately be destroyed. If any court
of competent jurisdiction considers this
clause void and unenforceable, in whole or
in part, for any reason, this Agreement shall
be considered terminated and null and void,
in its entirety, and any and all copies of the
Data shall immediately be destroyed.

Introduction

8 Additional Provisions with respect to
POI Data only.
a No Creation of Mailing Lists.
You are prohibited from using the POIs (i) to
create mailing lists or (ii) for other such similar uses.
b Compliance.
You will use the POIs in compliance with all
applicable federal, state and local laws,
rules and regulations.
c Indemnification.
You shall indemnify and hold infoUSA, Inc.
harmless against all third party claims or
liability which are based in whole or in part
of the users failure to comply with such
laws, rules and regulations or which result
from the use of the POIs through you.
d Warranty.
In addition to the Warranties contained in
the Agreement, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT
THE POIS ARE LICENSED ON AN “AS IS”
BASIS WITHOUT GUARANTEE, AND
THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES
MADE WHETHER, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
e POIs Segregation.

Chapter

Introduction

You are prohibited from combining or merging the POIs with any other POI data. The
POIs shall be maintained in such a way
that they are separately identifiable from all
other POI data at all times.

Miscellaneous.
This is the exclusive and complete Agreement between Tele Atlas and you regarding
its subject matter. Nothing in this Agreement shall create a joint venture, partnership or principal-agent relationship between
Tele Atlas and you. The internal laws of California shall govern this Agreement and you
consent to the jurisdiction of the Northern
District of California or the State of California for the County of Santa Clara. Sections 2
– 4 and 7 – 11 shall survive the expiration or
termination of this Agreement. This Agreement may be amended, altered, or modified
only by Tele Atlas. You may not assign any
part of this Agreement without Tele Atlas’
prior written consent. You acknowledge and
understand that the Data may be subject to
restrictions on exportation and agree to
comply with any applicable export laws. In
the event that any provision or part of a provision of this Agreement is determined to be
invalid, illegal, or unenforceable, such provision or part thereof shall be stricken from
this Agreement and the remainder of this
Agreement shall be valid, legal, and enforceable to the maximum extent possible. Any
notice under this Agreement shall be delivered by courier to Tele Atlas North America,
Inc., Attention Contracts Department, 11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH 03766 USA. The
covenants and obligations undertaken by
you herein are intended for the direct benefit of Tele Atlas and may be enforced by Tele
Atlas directly against you.

ways made after that time may not be reflected in this database.
! It is strictly prohibited to reproduce and use
any part or the whole of this map in any
form without permission from the copyright
owner.
! If the local traffic regulations or conditions
deviate from this data, follow the local traffic regulations (such as signs, indications,
etc.) and conditions (such as construction,
weather, etc.).
! The traffic regulation data used in the map
database applies only to standard sized
passenger vehicles. Note that regulations
for larger vehicles, motorbikes, and other
non-standard vehicles are not included in
the database.

Copyright
©1984-2007 Tele Atlas, Rel. 03/2006
“NOTICE
© 2001 – 2007 Tele Atlas. All rights reserved.
This material is proprietary and the subject of
copyright protection and other intellectual
property rights owned or licensed to Tele Atlas.
Tele Atlas is an authorized distributor of selected Statistics Canada computer files under
Agreement number 6776 and is an authorized
distributor of selected Geomatics Canada
computer files. The product includes information copied with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Canada Post
Corporation. The use of this material is subject
to the terms of a License Agreement. You will
be held liable for any unauthorized copying or
disclosure of this material.”
Data by Info USA ©2007 All Rights Reserved.

About the Data for the Map
Database
! This database was developed and recorded
up to May 2007. Changes to streets/high-

Chapter

Introduction

Music recognition technology and related
data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is
the industry standard in music recognition
technology and related content delivery. For
more information visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and service may practice
one or more of the following U.S. Patents:
#5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773,
#6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207,
#6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied
under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523. Gracenote and CDDB are
registered trademarks of Gracenote. The
Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.

Gracenote® End User License Agreement
Version 20061005
This application or device contains software
from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California
(“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote
(the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification
and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote
Servers”) and to perform other functions. You
may use Gracenote Data only by means of the
intended End-User functions of this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial
use only. You agree not to assign, copy, trans-

fer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any
Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE
NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to
use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if
you violate these restrictions. If your license
terminates, you agree to cease any and all use
of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no
circumstances will Gracenote become liable
for any payment to you for any information
that you provide. You agree that Gracenote,
Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier
to track queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count
queries without knowing anything about who
you are. For more information, see the web
page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the
Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the
right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any
cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No
warranty is made that the Gracenote Software
or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that
functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote
is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories
that Gracenote may provide in the future and
is free to discontinue its services at any time.

Introduction

About Gracenote®

Chapter

Introduction
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR
USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR
FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
© Gracenote 2006

Other Precautions
! Part of the data cannot be acquired. The
contents of the data in the Gracenote® Database included in the hard disk drive are
not 100 % guaranteed.
! The Gracenote® Database included in the
hard disk drive contains the titles for the
300 000 most frequently accessed albums
worldwide as of August 2007.

Chapter

Before Using the System
Important Safety Information

WARNING
! Do not attempt to install or service your navigation system by yourself. Installation or servicing of the navigation system by persons
without training and experience in electronic
equipment and automotive accessories may
be dangerous and could expose you to the
risk of electric shock or other hazards.
! When a route is calculated, the route and
voice guidance for the route is automatically
set. Also, for day or time traffic regulations,
only information about traffic regulations at
the time when the route was calculated is
shown. One-way streets and street closures
may not be taken into consideration. For example, if a street is open during the morning
only, but you arrive later, it would be against
the traffic regulations so you cannot drive
along the set route. When driving, please follow the actual traffic signs. Also, the system
may not know some traffic regulations.

p Read the entire manual before operating
this navigation system.
p The navigation features of your navigation
system (and rear view camera option if purchased) are intended solely as an aid to
you in the operation of your vehicle. It is
not a substitute for your attentiveness,
judgment, and care when driving.
p Do not operate this navigation system (or
the rear view camera option if purchased) if
doing so will divert your attention in any
way from the safe operation of your vehicle.
Always observe safe driving rules and follow all existing traffic regulations. If you experience difficulty in operating the system
or reading the display, park your vehicle in
a safe location and apply the parking brake
before making the necessary adjustments.

p Never allow others to use the system unless they have read and understood the operating instructions.
p Never use this navigation system to route
to hospitals, police stations or similar facilities in an emergency. Stop using any functions relating to the hands-free phone and
please call 911.
p Route and guidance information displayed
by this equipment is for reference purposes
only. It may not accurately reflect the latest
permissible routes, road conditions, one
way streets, road closures, or traffic restrictions.
p Traffic restrictions and advisories currently
in force should always take precedence
over guidance given by the navigation system. Always obey current traffic restrictions, even if the navigation system
provides contrary advice.
p Failure to set correct information about the
local time may result in the navigation system providing improper routing and guidance instructions.
p Never set the volume of your navigation
system so high that you cannot hear outside traffic and emergency vehicles.
p To promote safety, certain functions are disabled unless the vehicle is stopped and/or
the parking brake is applied.
p The data encoded in the hard disk drive for
the navigation system is the intellectual
property of the provider, and the provider is
responsible for such content.
p Keep this manual handy as a reference for
operating procedures and safety information.
p Pay close attention to all warnings in this
manual and follow the instructions carefully.
p Do not install this navigation system where
it may (i) obstruct the driver’s vision, (ii) impair the performance of any of the vehicle’s
operating systems or safety features, including air bags or hazard lamp buttons or
(iii) impair the driver’s ability to safely operate the vehicle.
En

Before Using the System

Before using your navigation system, be sure
to read and fully understand the following
safety information:

Chapter

Before Using the System
p Please remember to wear your seat belt at
all times while operating your vehicle. If
you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe if your
seat belt is not properly buckled.
p Never use headphones while driving.

Additional Safety Information
To ensure safe driving
Parking brake interlock
Certain functions (such as viewing of DVD
video and certain touch panel key operations)
offered by this navigation system could be
dangerous and/or unlawful if used while driving. To prevent such functions from being
used while the vehicle is in motion, there is an
interlock system that senses when the parking
brake is set and when the vehicle is moving. If
you attempt to use the functions described
above while driving, they will become disabled
until you stop the vehicle in a safe place, and
apply the parking brake. Please keep the brake
pedal pushed down before releasing the parking brake.

WARNING
! To avoid the risk of damage and injury and the
potential violation of applicable laws, the navigation system is not for use with a “Video
image” that is visible to the driver.
! In some countries or states the viewing of
“Video image” on a display inside a vehicle
even by persons other than the driver may be
illegal. Where such regulations apply, they
must be obeyed.
! When applying the parking brake in order to
view “Video image” or to enable other functions offered by the navigation system, park
your vehicle in a safe place, and keep the
brake pedal pushed down before releasing the
parking brake if the vehicle is parked on a hill
or otherwise might move when releasing the
parking brake.

CAUTION
! Accuracy/performance of interlock may be impacted by such factors as GPS signal detection, speed pulse wire connectivity, and
driving habits or conditions of the place where
the vehicle is parked.
! It is strongly suggested that the speed pulse
wire be connected for accuracy of navigation
and better performance of interlock.
! If the speed pulse wire is unavailable for some
reason, it is recommended that the pulse generator ND-PG1 (sold separately) be used.

When you attempt to watch “Video image”
while driving, the warning “Viewing of front
seat video source while driving is strictly
prohibited.” will appear on the screen. To
watch “Video image” on this display, stop the
vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking
brake. Please keep the brake pedal pushed
down before releasing the parking brake.
Rear view camera and [Rear View]
mode
With an optional rear view camera, you are
able to use the navigation system as an aid to
keep an eye on trailers or to back into a tight
parking spot.

WARNING
! SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR REVERSED.
! USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR MIRROR
IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA. OTHER USE
MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE.

Features (Characteristics of
this software)
Touch panel key operation
It is possible to operate the navigation functions and the Audio functions by using touch
panel keys.

Chapter

Before Using the System

Wide variety of facility information for
Points of Interest (POI) Search
You can search for your destination from all
areas.
! Approximately 12 million POIs are included
in the database.
! Some POI information may not be accurate
or may become inaccurate through the
passage of time. Please contact the POI directly to verify the accuracy of the information about the POI that appears in this
database. POI information is subject to
change without notice.
Auto reroute function
If you deviate from the set route, the system
will re-calculate the route from that point so
that you remain on track to the destination.
p This function may not work in certain
areas.
Auto CD title and MP3 file listing
Title lists are automatically displayed when a
CD or MP3 disc is played. This system provides easy-to-operate audio functions that
allow playback simply by selecting an item
from the list.

images can be set as a background or splash
screen, or as a picture in an address book or
phone book entry.
Data communication function with XM
tuner
If you connect the optional XM tuner (GEXP10XMT) to the navigation system, you can
use traffic information as a part of the navigation function. A separate subscription for XM
NavTraffic is required.
In addition, if you subscribe to XM Audio services, you can utilize the XM display which features station logos and category icons,
improving your XM Audio experience.
= For details, refer to Using XM NavTraffic Information on page 65
= For more details about “Listening to XM Satellite Radio”, refer to Using the AV Source (XM,
SIRIUS) on page 123
p The icon of each broadcast station is contained in the hard disk drive based on the
data provided by XM Satellite Radio as of
October 2007.
Any changes made by XM Satellite Radio
in the lineup or icon of the broadcast station in the future may not be supported by
the navigation system, and may cause the
unit to display incorrect icons.

Before Using the System

Variety of view modes
Various types of screen display can be selected for navigation guidance.

CAUTION
Rear View is to use the navigation system as an
aid to keep an eye on the trailers, or while backing up. Do not use this function for entertainment
purposes.

Compatible voice recognition system
Connecting the supplied microphone will enable voice operation for both the navigation
and AV functions.
Original image assignment
You can store your own pictures on a CD-R in
JPEG format and import original images in
this navigation system. These imported

Chapter

Before Using the System
About XM NavTraffic Service
and Pioneer Navigation
p XM NavTraffic subscription is required and
is available only in select markets. Check
www.xmnavtraffic.com for service availability, pricing information, and other details.
The availability of XM NavTraffic data depends on the ability of the antenna to receive a signal. The signal may be
unavailable if obstructed (e.g., by buildings,
mountains, trees, bridges, bad weather,
etc.). XM NavTraffic data also may be unavailable or not current if the original data
source is not providing data (e.g., scheduled or unscheduled downtime) or has not
been updated, or if there is a time lag between the time when the original data
source is updated and when you receive
the updated XM NavTraffic data.
p Depending on the amount of data being
transmitted in your area, it may take several
minutes to display all of the available data.
p The information content depends on the information provided by XM NavTraffic Service, including data refreshing and
availability timing.
p Pioneer does not bear responsibility for the
accuracy of the information transmitted.
p Pioneer does not bear responsibility for
changes to information services provided
by XM, such as cancellation of the services
or subscription updates.
p Traffic information is not taken into account
when calculating estimated time of arrival
time or travel time for your destination.

Notes for Hard Disk Drive
Recording equipment and
copyright
Recording equipment should be used only for
lawful copying and you are advised to check
carefully what defines lawful copying in the
country in which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or

music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal
exception or consented to by the right owners.

Notes when writing data to the
hard disk drive at low temperature
Writing to the hard disk drive, such as recording music to the music library, may be disabled when the navigation system detects
abnormally low temperatures inside the vehicle. Functionality will become available once
the temperature inside the vehicle returns to
normal. Additionally, if the low temperature
continues for a long time, the system may be
booted up with the preliminary mode because
the system can not recognize the hard disk
drive.
= For details, refer to When the Hard Disk
Drive is Disconnected on page 197

Points about recording
p Pioneer does not compensate for the contents that could not be recorded or any loss
of recorded data due to a malfunction or
failure of the navigation system.
p The data recorded on the navigation system
is not allowed to be used without permission from its right holder under copyright
law, except for personal entertainment.
p Make sure to check the recording operation
before recording and check the recorded
contents after recording.
p Recording is not guaranteed for all CDs.

Chapter

Before Using the System
Data saved or recorded by the
customer

Failure to operate

Visit Our Web site
Visit us at the following site:
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com
In Canada
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca
1 Register your product. We will keep the details
of your purchase on file to help you refer to
this information in the event of an insurance
claim such as loss or theft.
2 Receive updates on the latest products and
technologies.
3 Download owner’s manuals, order product
catalogues, research new products, and
much more.
4 Receive notices of software upgrades and
software updates.

Before Using the System

p The data saved or recorded onto this navigation system by the customer cannot be
extracted from the navigation system, and
those services cannot be accepted.
p The data saved or recorded onto this navigation system by the customer cannot be
guaranteed during repair or service. Lost
data that was saved or recorded by the customer is not guaranteed.
p Due to copyrights, the music data recorded
into the Music Library cannot be backed up
during repair or service.

Should the navigation system fail to operate
properly, contact your dealer or nearest
authorized Pioneer service facility.
After-sales service for Pioneer products
Please contact the dealer or distributor from
which you purchased the product for aftersales service (including warranty conditions)
or any other information. In case the necessary
information is not available, please contact the
companies listed below.
Please do not ship your product to the companies at the addresses listed below for repair
without making advance contact.
! U.S.A
Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc.
CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION
P.O. Box 1760 Long Beach, CA 90801-1760
800-421-1404
! CANADA
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.
CUSTOMER SATISFACTION DEPARTMENT
300 Allstate Parkway Markham, Ontario
L3R 0P2
1-877-283-5901
For warranty information, please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.

Chapter

Basic Operation
Flow from Startup to
Termination

4 Assign a destination by using the touch
panel key and beginning route guidance,
or operating the Audio source.

At first, please confirm the positions of the following features using the “Hardware Manual”.
! MAP button
! MENU button
! AV button
! OPEN CLOSE button
1 Start the engine to boot up the system.
After a short pause, the navigation splash
screen comes on for a few seconds.
# When you use the navigation system for the
first time, [Regional Settings] screen appears.
On [Regional Settings] screen, you can change
the language or time. (The settings can also be
changed afterward.)
= For details, refer to Customizing the Regional
Settings on page 88

2 Check the details of the caution message and touch [OK].
You can operate the navigation system by
touching keys displayed on the screen. The
map of your surroundings is displayed. If the
route is already set, the screen changes to
route guidance mode.
= For details, refer to Switching the view mode
on page 38
= For details, refer to Setting the time difference on page 89
p To protect the LCD screen from damage, be
sure to touch the touch panel keys with a
finger. (The stylus is supplied for special calibrations. Do not use the stylus for normal
operations.)

3 Press MENU button.
This displays the navigation menu.

p Touch panel keys that are not available at
this time are inactive.

= For more details about “Specifying the address and searching for the destination”, refer
to Calculating your destination by using Address Search on page 28
= For more details about “Other search methods”, refer to Chapter 6
= For more details about “How to use audio
source”, refer to Using the AV Source (Built-in
DVD Drive and Radio) on page 97
5 Turn off the vehicle engine to terminate the system.
The navigation system is also turned off.
p Until your vehicle reaches the vicinity of the
destination, the set route will not be deleted
even if the engine is turned off.

How to Use Navigation
Menu Screens
The basic navigation is performed by using
menus.
The navigation menu is divided into four
menus: [Destination], [Information], [Map],
and [Settings].

Displaying the Navigation menu
1

Press MENU button.

2 To change to the menu you want to
use, touch the name of the menu displayed
at the top of the screen.
3 If you want to return to the map, press
MENU button.

Chapter

Basic Operation
Navigation menu overview
[Destination] menu

able for cities where information is provided
by XM NavTraffic service. Active subscription
to XM NavTraffic is required to receive traffic
information on the navigation system.
= For details, refer to Using XM NavTraffic Information on page 65
= For details, refer to Emergency Info on
page 72
ND-BT1*2 :
Sold separately. Use for hands-free phoning
and business card transfer via Bluetooth technology.

Basic Operation

You can search your destination in this menu.
You can also check or cancel your set route
from this menu.
= For more details about “Specifying the address and searching for the destination”, refer
to Calculating your destination by using Address Search on the next page
= For more details about “Other search methods”, refer to Chapter 6

[Map] menu

[Information] menu

Use this menu to check traffic information
using the GEX-P10XMT*1.
If you are using a cellular phone featuring
Bluetooth technology by connecting the Bluetooth unit (ND-BT1)*2 (sold separately) to the
navigation system, you can configure Bluetooth settings or check the outgoing/incoming
call history. You can also register information
for emergencies.
p [Traffic On Route], [Traffic Events], [Traffic Flow], [Stock Info], [Set My Favorites],
and [My Favorites] can be active only
when the GEX-P10XMT*1 is connected to
the navigation system.
p [Phone Menu] is active only when the
Bluetooth unit (ND-BT1)*2 is connected to
the navigation system.
GEX-P10XMT*1:
XM Digital Satellite Data & Audio Receiver
(sold separately). Traffic information only avail-

You can change [View Mode], or set the
items to be displayed during the navigation
function.
p [View Mode] can be selected only when
the vehicle position is at the current position. If you want to select [View Mode]
while scrolling the map, press MAP button
to center the current position back on the
vehicle position.
[Settings] menu

Customize the navigation functions so they
can be used easily.
= For details, refer to Chapter 11
Buttons you can use

Chapter

Basic Operation
The availability of a specific button or function
is indicated by its appearance. Depending on
the status of your vehicle, some buttons will
be available, while others will not be.

4 Enter the information about your destination to calculate route.

Confirm the location on the map.

Check and decide the route.

Active touch panel key: The button is operable.
7 Your navigation system sets the route
to your destination, and the map of your
surroundings appears.
Inactive touch panel key: The function is not
available (e.g., operation is prohibited while
driving).

Basic Navigation
CAUTION
For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these
basic navigation functions while your vehicle is in
motion. To enable these functions, you must stop
in a safe place and apply the parking brake (=
Refer to To ensure safe driving on page 22).

8 After releasing the parking brake, drive
in accordance with the navigation information, subject to the important safety instructions noted on Important Safety
Information on page 21 and Additional
Safety Information on page 22.

Calculating your destination by
using Address Search

Basic flow of operation

The most frequently used function is [Address
Search], in which the address is specified and
the destination is searched. This section describes how to use [Address Search] and the
basics of using the navigation system.

1 Park your vehicle in a safe place, and
apply the parking brake.

1 Press MENU button to display the navigation menu.
2 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu.

2 Press MENU button to display the navigation menu.

3 Select the method of searching for your
destination.

3 Touch [Address Search].
Select the method for searching the destination.

Chapter

Basic Operation

p Once the state has been selected, you only
have to change states when your destination is outside of the state that you selected.
State code key

p When entering the characters, the system
will automatically search the database for
all possible options. If there is only one letter that could possibly follow your entry,
that letter will automatically be entered.
p A list appears if multiple options exist. Select the desired one from the list and proceed to the next step. In rare cases, you
may need to input the city name to determine the city.
# Operation of state selection screen

Basic Operation

4 Touch [State code key] to select the
state, province, or territory.
If the destination is in another state, this
changes the state setting.

Selected state

:
The input text is deleted one letter at a time
from the end of the text. Continuing to touch
the button deletes all of the text.
[Back]:
Returns you to the previous screen.
5 Input the house number and touch
[OK].
Touch the characters you want to input.
p You can also input a prefix to the house
number.
p Touching [OK] with no input allows you to
specify and search for the name of the
street, city, or area first.

6 Input the street name.
When the options are narrowed down to six or
less, a list of the matching streets automatically appears.
When you enter the same characters that
were entered previously, the system automatically displays the characters that follow the entered characters. (Auto fill-in function)

1 [A-B] to [U-Z] :
Use to jump to the first state, province, or
territory that starts with that letter.
2
:
Use to see the next page or previous page
of the list.
3 State list:
Press one of these items to set it as search
area.
4 [Back]:
Returns previous screen.
# Operation of street name or city name
input screen (e.g. QWERTY keyboard)
8

6 2

1 State code key :

Chapter

Basic Operation

4
5
6
7

Jump to the state selection screen. (Selected state code is displayed.)
[OK]:
Confirms the characters displayed in 4,
and proceeds to the next step.
[List]:
Lists candidates based on yellow characters
in 4. Touch the desired item item in the list
to proceed to the next step.
Text box:
Displays the characters that are entered.
Keyboard:
Use to enter the text.
[Back]:
Returns previous screen.
:
Deletes the input text one letter at a time
from the end of the text. Continuing to
touch the button deletes all of the text.
[City]:
Touch if you want to specify the destination
city or area first. (This is available only when
4 is blank.)
[Sym.], [0-9]:
Input text with marks such as [&] or [+] or
numbers.
Touch to toggle the selection.
[Street]:
Touch if you want to return the street input
mode. (This is available only when 4 is
blank.)
[Center]:
This can be selected when you enter a city
or area name first. Touch this button to display the central point of the entered city or
area. Touching [OK] searches the route to
the central point.
Proceed to Step 9.
p You can customize the keyboard type to
be displayed on the screen.
= For details, refer to Customizing the
keyboard layout on page 89

# Auto fill-in function

The previously entered characters are stored for
each country and each The previously entered
characters are stored for each state and each
search function. The next time a character is entered, suggested characters will be shown. For example, if [E 220TH ST] has been entered in the
past, when you input just the letter [E], [E 220TH
ST] will be filled in automatically. The manually
input characters are displayed in yellow, and the
suggested characters are displayed in white, so
you can distinguish them. To confirm the filled-in
characters, touch [OK].

Touch the street from the list.

If the selected street has only one matching location, “Route confirmation screen” appears.
Proceed to Step 9.
8 Touch the city or area where your destination is located.

When a route is not set, route calculation
starts immediately.
= For details, refer to Checking and modifying
the route on page 32
When a route is already set, “Location confirmation screen” is shown.

Chapter

Basic Operation

= For details, refer to Checking the location
on the map on this page

Basic Operation

p If there is no matching location, the navigation system displays “The address does
not exit. Do you want to continue ?”.
When you touch [Yes], a place near the specified location appears. In this case, pay attention to the displayed location may not be
suitable for your intention. If you want to try
again, touch [No] to return to the previous
screen.
p If you did not input the house number in
Step 5, the house number input screen appear after this step. You should input the
house number now (perform Step 5).

Touching or on the scroll bar scrolls
through the list and allows you to view the
remaining items.
3
:
If all of characters cannot be displayed within the displayed area, touching to the
right of the item allows you to see remaining characters.
:
4
Touching displays a map of the place
you have selected. (Possibilities for place
names may appear with the list screen.)
You can also set a destination by touching
to the right of the list. Touch [OK] to set
the location indicated by the scroll cursor
as your destination.
5 [Back]:
Returns previous screen.
# Checking the location on the map
Location confirmation screen

1
2
3

Route calculation starts.

When the route calculation is completed,
“Route confirmation screen” appears.

# Operation of street list screen
3 4

1 Number of possible choices
:
2

1 Calculating the route to the destination
Route calculation starts. When the route
calculation is completed, “Route confirmation screen” appears.
p If you press MAP button or MENU button during route calculation, the calculation is canceled and the map screen
appears.
2 Scrolling the map
The map display changes to the scroll
mode. You can fine-tune the location in the
scroll mode, and then you can set the location as your destination or do various operations by using the shortcut menu.
= For details, refer to Shortcut menu on
page 45
3 Setting the location as a waypoint
The location indicated by the scroll cursor
will be set as a waypoint.

Chapter

Basic Operation

= For details, refer to Editing Waypoints on
page 36

Touch [OK] to decide your route.

Checking and modifying the route
You can check the route details. You can also
recalculate the route in different conditions.
Route confirmation screen

4
5
6
7
8
9
3

shows that freeways could not be
avoided.
shows that toll roads could not be
!
avoided when the setting [Avoid Toll
Road] is [On].
shows that ferries could not be
!
avoided when the setting [Avoid Ferry]
is [On].
shows for routes that contain streets
!
or bridges that are subject to traffic regulations during a certain time when the
setting [Time restrictions] is [On].
!

2 Distance to the destination
3 Travel time to destination
4 Set the displayed route
Sets the displayed route as your route, and
starts the route guidance.
= For details, refer to When the route guidance
starts on the next page
5 Display multiple routes
You can select a desired route from multiple
route options. Calculated routes are shown in
different colors.

1 Route calculation condition
Shows the route has been calculated under
those conditions.

!
!
!
!
!

shows that fastest route is prioritized.
shows that shortest route is prioritized.
shows that using highways and main
roads are prioritized.
shows whether the suggested
route includes freeways.
shows whether the suggested
route includes toll roads. The current
setting appears.
shows whether the suggested
route includes ferries. The current setting appears.
shows whether the suggested
route includes learning routes. The current setting appears.

In addition, if the calculated route has unintended results, the following icons will be
shown.

Touching
to
switch to another route.
Touching [OK] returns to the previous display.
If you set waypoints, you cannot use the multiple route option.

p There can be cases that the same route
is displayed even when multiple routes
are searched.
p In multiple route calculations, both
routes that use and avoid the freeways
are calculated independently of the setting for [Avoid Freeway].
6 Change the route calculation condition
Modify each calculation condition, and recalculate the route.
= For details, refer to Modifying the Route Calculation Conditions on page 34
7 View the route profile

Chapter

Basic Operation

When the route guidance starts
Touching [OK] in “Route confirmation screen”
starts the route guidance on the displayed
route. Your navigation system gives you the following information with the timing adjusted to
the speed of your vehicle:
— Distance to the next turning point
— Direction of travel
— Road number of the freeway
— Arrival of waypoint (If waypoints are set)
— Arrival of your destination
or
allows you to turn the
p Touching
voice guidance on or off.
allows you to hear the inp Touching
formation again.
p If you stop at a gas station or a restaurant
during the route guidance, your navigation
system remembers your destination and
route information. When you start the engine and get back on the road, the route
guidance resumes.
p If you deviate from the route with guidance
set to [Route View] or [Guide Mode] and
enter a street not recorded on the hard disk
drive, the screen changes to [Map Mode].
When you return to the route, the screen returns to the original view and resumes
route guidance.
Basic items on the screen
This section describes only the basic items
that are displayed on the Map Mode screen.

= For more details about “Details of the map
screen”, refer to How to Use the Map on page
38

1
2
3
4

Basic Operation

You can check the streets that you will travel
to reach the destination.
= For details, refer to Checking the passing
streets with a list on page 35
8 Check the shape of route
You can check the overall shape of your route
and the location of destination on the map.
= For details, refer to Checking the entire route
overview on the map on page 36
9 Adding and edit waypoint
You can add, remove, or sort waypoints.
= For details, refer to Editing Waypoints on
page 36

Current location
Distance to the destination
Estimated time of arrival (default)
ON/OFF key for voice guidance

Canceling the Route Guidance
If you no longer need to travel to your destination or if you want to change your destination,
follow the steps below to cancel the route guidance.
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Cancel Route].
A message confirming whether to cancel the
current route appears.
2

Touch [Yes].

The current route is deleted, and a map of
your surroundings reappears.
On this screen, you can also select the following items:
[Skip]:
Skip the route to the selected waypoint, and recalculate the route. (The skipped waypoint will
not be deleted.)
[No]:
Returns to the previous display without deleting the route.

Chapter

Basic Operation

Modifying the Route
Calculation Conditions
You can modify the conditions for route calculation and recalculate the current route.
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Route Overview].
p [Route Overview] is displayed only when
the route is set.

Touch [Options].

3 Touch the desired items to change the
route calculation conditions and then
touch [OK].

The route is recalculated, and “Route confirmation screen” appears.
When a single route is calculated, the system
searches for the route that meets these conditions as closely as possible.
p A single route is calculated in the following
cases:
— When a waypoint is set
— When a route is set through voice recognition
— When auto reroute is carried out

Items that users can operate
Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show that
these are default or factory settings.
Route Condition
This setting controls how the route should be
calculated by taking into account the time or
the distance or the main road.
Determine which condition takes priority for
route calculation.
[Fast]*:
Calculate a route with the shortest travel time
to your destination as a priority.
[Short]:
Calculate a route with the shortest distance to
your destination as a priority.
[Main Road]:
Calculate a route that passes major arterial
road as a priority.
Avoid Toll Road
This setting controls whether toll roads (including toll areas) should be taken into account.
[Off]*:
Calculate a route that may include toll roads
(including toll areas).
[On]:
Calculate a route that avoids toll roads (including toll areas).
p The system may calculate a route that includes toll road even if [On] is selected.
Avoid Ferry
This setting controls whether ferry crossings
should be taken into account.
[Off]*:
Calculate a route that may include ferries.
[On]:
Calculate a route that avoids ferries.
p The system may calculate a route that includes ferry way even if [On] is selected.
Avoid Freeway
This setting controls whether freeways may be
included in the route calculation.
[Off]*:

Chapter

Basic Operation

Time restrictions
This setting controls whether streets or
bridges have traffic restrictions during a certain time should be taken into account.
p If you want to set your route to avoid
opened bridges, select [On].
[On]*:
Calculate a route while avoiding streets or
bridges with traffic restrictions during a certain time.
[Off]:
Calculate a route while ignoring traffic restrictions.
p The system may calculate a route that includes streets or bridges that are subject to
traffic restrictions during a certain time
even if [On] is selected.

Checking the Current Route
You can check information about the route between your current location and your destination.
You can select two methods:
! Checking the passing streets with a list
! Checking the entire route overview on the
map

Checking the passing streets
with a list

Basic Operation

Calculate a route that may include freeways.
[On]:
Calculate a route that avoids freeways.
p The system may calculate a route that includes freeway even if [On] is selected.

You can check the route details.
p This function is not available if your vehicle
has deviated from the route.
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Route Overview].
“Route confirmation screen” appears.

p [Route Overview] is displayed only when
the route is set.

Touch [Profile].

CAUTION
If the time difference is not set correctly, the navigation system cannot consider traffic regulations
correctly. Set the time difference correctly (=
Refer to Setting the time difference on page 89).

Learning Route
The system learns the travel history of your vehicle for each road.
This setting controls whether or not the travel
history should be taken into account.
[On]*:
Calculate the route with the travel history
taken into account.
[Off]:
Calculate the route without the travel history
taken into account.
[Clear]:
Clear the current travel history.

3 Touch or to scroll the list.
Scroll the list as necessary.
Names of the streets you are driving through

Turning direction

Driving distance

4 Touch [Back].
You can return to the previous display.

Chapter

Basic Operation

p When a long distance route is calculated,
your navigation system may not be able to
list all roads. (In this case, the remaining
roads will be shown in the list as you drive
on.)

Checking the entire route
overview on the map
You can check the entire shape of the current
route.
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Route Overview].
“Route confirmation screen” appears.

p [Route Overview] is displayed only when
the route is set.

Touch [Detail].

view] is selected on [Short-Cut
Selection].

Editing Waypoints
You can select waypoints (locations you want
to visit on the way to your destination) and you
can recalculate the route to pass through
these locations.

Adding a waypoint
Up to 5 waypoints can be selected, and selected points can be sorted automatically or
manually.
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Route Overview].
2 Touch [Waypoints].
The waypoint menu screen appears.
3

3 Touch the screen and place the scroll
cursor on the point where you want to
view the detail or the entire picture. Or
zoom in or zoom out the map scale.

The map around the scroll cursor is zoomed in
or out so you can view the detail or the entire
picture.
4 Touch [Back].
The screen returns to the previous display.
p You can also check the overview by using
the shortcut menu if [Whole Route Over-

Touch [Add].

The “Select Search Method” screen appears.
After searching for a point, display it on a
map, then touch [OK] to add to the waypoints.
(You can add up to 5 waypoints in total.)
4 Touch [OK].
A route is recalculated, and “Route confirmation screen” appears.
= For details, refer to Checking and modifying
the route on page 32
p If you set waypoints in the route to your destination, the route up to the next waypoint
will appear in light green. The rest of the
route will appear in light blue.

Chapter

Basic Operation
Deleting a waypoint
You can delete waypoints from the route and
then recalculate the route. (You can delete
waypoints successively.)

2 Touch [Waypoints].
The waypoint menu screen appears.

the other points (including your destination) in
order of distance from the waypoint 1.
[Manual]:
You can manually sort destination and waypoints. Touch the destination and waypoints
on the left side of the screen in the order you
want to visit. The touched destination and waypoints are displayed on the right side of the
screen. Touch [OK] to complete the sorting
and the previous screen appears.

3 Touch [Delete], then touch the waypoint you want to delete.
The touched waypoint will be deleted from the
list.
4 Touch [OK].
The route is recalculated, and “Route confirmation screen” appears.
= For details, refer to Checking and modifying
the route on page 32

Sorting waypoints

4 Touch [OK].
The route is calculated again, and “Route confirmation screen” appears.
= For details, refer to Checking and modifying
the route on page 32

You can sort waypoints and recalculate the
route.

Skipping a waypoint

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

If points are set, the next waypoint along the
route can be skipped.

2 Touch [Waypoints].
The waypoint menu screen appears.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Cancel Route].

3 Touch [Sort], then touch [Automatic] or
[Manual].

2 Touch [Skip].
A new route to your destination through all remaining waypoints, except for the skipped
waypoint, is calculated.
“Route confirmation screen” appears.
= For details, refer to Checking and modifying
the route on page 32

Basic Operation

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

[Automatic]:
You can sort the destination and waypoints
automatically. The system will show the nearest waypoint (distance in a straight line) from
the current location as waypoint 1, and sort

Chapter

How to Read the Map Display

How to Use the Map
Most of the information provided by your navigation system can be seen on the map. You
need to get to know how the information appears on the map.

Map Mode
Displays the standard map.
1

k
9

g
5

Switching the view mode
There are six types of map display and two additional view modes.
! Map Mode
! Guide Mode (during route guidance only)
! Route View (during route guidance only)
! Driver’s View
! 2D Twin Map View
! 3D Twin Map View
! Vehicle Dynamics
! Rear View (Only possible when
[Camera Input] is set to [On].)
1 Press MAP button to display a map of
the area around your current position.
2

3
b
8

p This example shows a case where [Second
Maneuver Arrow] is set to [View].

k
9
g
5
6

Route View
Displays the name of the street you will travel
along next and an arrow indicating the direction of travel.
a

k
9
d

2
f
m
3
b

5
6
7
8

How to view the map of the
current location

2
f
m
3
b

p You can display the view mode screen by
touching [Map] in the navigation menu,
and touching [View Mode].

c l

Guide Mode
Overlays two arrows onto the standard map
([Map Mode]).

Press MAP button again.

3 Touch the mode name to select the
mode you want to display.

Chapter

How to Read the Map Display
Driver’s View
Shows a map from the driver’s viewpoint.
1

k
9

f
m
3
b

d
5
6
7
8

About the 3D POI
Depending on the data, the POI may appear in
graphical 3D or plate format with POI mark in
the left screen of [Driver’s View].
p The displayed POI in the left screen has no
relation with the setting of [Overlay POI].
2D Twin Map View
You can split the screen in half. The right
screen and the left screen can display a map
in different scales. The 2D map appears on
the left screen.
a

2
f
m
6
3
b

d
5

3D Twin Map View
You can split the screen in half. The right
screen and the left screen can display a map
in different scales. The 3D map appears on
the left screen.
a

2
f
m
6
3
b

d
5
6

p Selects whether to display or hide the 3D
Landmark on the map.
= For details, refer to 3D Landmark on page
47
Vehicle Dynamics Display
Indicates the status of your vehicle.

How to Read the Map Display

CAUTION
In Vehicle Dynamics Display mode, the speedometer display may show a different speed than
your vehicle’s actual speedometer, because your
unit measures speed in a different way.

p You can change the items indicated on the
left and right meters.
= For details, refer to Setting the Vehicle
Dynamics Display on page 76

Chapter

How to Read the Map Display
Rear View
Rear view image is displayed on the left-hand
side of the screen, while the map of your surroundings is indicated on the right.
2

Enlarged map of the intersection
This screen is displayed only when [Close Up
View] in [Map] menu is [2D] or [3D].
Enlarged map of the intersection (2D)

k
d
9
d
5

f
m

6
e
8

p If [Camera Input] is set to [Off], the rear
view image is not displayed. Please set it to
[On].
= For details, refer to Setting for rear view
camera on page 149
p When using a camera set to turn On/Off in
conjunction with the reverse signal, no
camera images will be displayed in rear
view mode while you are moving forward.
p If the camera is set always On, it can display images in rear view mode when the vehicle is moving forward. In that case, you
should ask the camera maker or dealer
whether the camera’s functions or lifetime
would be affected.
p Rear View can be displayed at all times
(e.g. when monitoring an attached trailer)
as a split screen where map information is
partially displayed. Please beware that in
this setting, camera image is not resized to
fit to screen, and that a portion of camera
image may not be viewable.

Enlarged map of the intersection (3D)

Display during freeway driving
In certain locations of the freeway, lane information is available, indicating the recommended lane to be in to easily maneuver the
next guidance.
h

Chapter

How to Read the Map Display
While driving on the freeway, freeway exit
numbers and freeway signs may be displayed
when in the vicinity of interchanges and exits.
j

p If the data for these items is not contained
in the hard disk drive, the information is
not available even if there are the signs on
the actual road.
City Map
When [City Map] in [Map] menu is [On], in
certain metropolitan city areas, a more detailed [City Map] is available at the 0.05 mile
(50 m) map scale or lower. (The screen
changes automatically when you enter certain
metropolitan city area.)
1

2
5
3
b

p The detailed city map may not appear for
the following reasons:
— The data for that city area is not contained in the hard disk drive.
— When you are driving on a freeway.
Display items
p Information with the mark (*) appears only
when the route is set.
p Depending on the conditions and settings,
some items may not be displayed.
Current location

The current location of your vehicle. The tip of
the triangular mark indicates your heading
and the display moves automatically as you
drive.
p The head of the triangular mark is the current vehicle position.
Destination*
The checkered flag indicates your destination.
Guidance point*
The next guidance point (next turning point,
etc.) is shown by a yellow flag.
Up to the next three guidance points are displayed.
Waypoint*
The checkered flag and number (1 to 5) indicates your waypoint.
1 Name of the street to be used (or next guidance point)*
2 Distance to the guidance point*
Touching
allows you to hear the information again.
3 Distance to the destination (or distance to
waypoint)*
The distance on this button shows the distance to the destination or to each waypoint. If
waypoints are set, the distance to the destination and the next waypoint change with each
touch.

How to Read the Map Display

p When the vehicle position is on the
route, the distance to the destination (or
waypoint) appears. When the vehicle position is not on the route, the linear distance to the destination (or waypoint)
appears.
4 Street name (or city name) that your vehicle is traveling along
5 Compass
The red arrow indicates north. If the scale is
less than 25 mile (50 km), touching the map
changes the direction that it is displayed in
(north up/ heading up). When the scale of the
map is greater than 25 mile (50 km), it is fixed
to “North up”.

! Heading up:
The map display always shows the vehicle’s direction as proceeding toward the
top of the screen.
En

Chapter

How to Read the Map Display
! North up:
The map display always has north at the
top of the screen.
6 Zoom in/Zoom out
Touch to change the map’s scale.
= For details, refer to Changing the scale of
the map on the next page
7 Map scale
The scale of the map is indicated by distance.
8 VOICE icon
Touch to change to the voice recognition
mode.

p This is displayed only when the microphone for voice recognition is connected.
= For details, refer to Chapter 18
9 Traffic status
This appears when an XM satellite radio tuner
(GEX-P10XMT, sold separately) is connected
and traffic information is received.
TRFC — No problem.
ANTENNA — Improper antenna connection.
UPDATING — Updating encryption code.
= For details, refer to Checking the Reception
Status of the XM Tuner on page 72
a Current time
b Estimated time of arrival (or travel time to
your destination)*
The display alternates by pressing it.

p The estimated time of arrival is an ideal
value calculated based on the value set
for [Average Speed] and the actual
driving speed. The estimated time of arrival is only a reference value, and does
not guarantee arrival at that time.
= For details, refer to Changing the virtual speed of the vehicle on page 90
c Tracking dot
The tracking dot shows the route your vehicle
has traveled by white dots.
= For more details about “Select the tracking
setting”, refer to Setting the Item on the Map
Screen on page 46
d Map of your surroundings (Side map)
Touching the screen changes the map to the
Scroll mode.

j
k

= For details, refer to Scroll the map to the location you want to see on the next page
Distance to a turning point*
Displayed on the enlarged intersection map.
The green bar gets shorter as your vehicle approaches a turning point.
Next direction of travel*
When you approach an intersection, it appears green. The screen displays the distance
to the next guidance point.
Direction line*
The direction towards your destination (or
scroll cursor) is indicated with a straight line.
Lane information*
Lane information is displayed the first time
there is a voice guidance on your route. The
white arrow on the green background indicates the recommended lane. If the next traveling direction screen is displayed when you
approach a interchange, junction, or exit, the
lane information disappears.
Freeway signs*
Show the road number and give directional information.
Freeway exit information*
Displays the freeway exit.
Bluetooth Connected icon
This icon shows whether the cellular phone
featuring Bluetooth technology is connected
or not. You can select between display and
non-display.
: Connected
: Disconnected

p This is available only when the Bluetooth unit (sold separately) is connected.
= For more details about “Selecting display or non-display for the Bluetooth
Connected icon”, refer to Setting the
Item on the Map Screen on page 46
l Mute Voice Guidance icon
Touch to turn on or off the mute setting of
Voice Guidance. You can select between display and non-display.

Chapter

How to Read the Map Display

Roads without turn-by-turn
instructions
Routable roads (the route displayed and highlighted in purple) have only basic data and
can only be used to plot a navigable route.
Pioneer Navigation will only display a navigable route on the map (only the arrival guidance for the destination or a waypoint is
available). Please review and obey all local traffic rules along the highlighted route. (For your
safety.)
No turn-by-turn directions will be displayed on
these roads.
When your vehicle reaches to the entrance of
this road, the icon will be displayed beside
the direction arrow, indicating that the guidance is not available with this type of road.
The icon will be indicated for roads that
have available guidance.
The Close-up of intersection function, Auto Reroute function, Changing the view to [Guide
Mode], or [Route View] are not available.

Changing the scale of the map
Touching or allows you to change the
map scale. Touch and holding or allows
you to change the scale in smaller step within
a range of 25 yards to 1000 miles (25 meters to
2000 kilometers). When the view mode is set
to Map Mode or Guide Mode, “Direct scale
key” is displayed. Touching “Direct scale key”
changes the map to the selected scale directly.

Direct scale key

p The icon of the entry in “Address Book” and
the traffic information icon are displayed
when the map scale is 10 miles (20 km) or
lower.
p Traffic lines are displayed when the map
scale is 2.5 miles (5 km) or lower.
p POI icons are displayed when the map
scale is 0.75 mile (1 km) or lower.

How to Read the Map Display

= For more details about “Selecting display or
non-display for the Mute Voice Guidance
icon”, refer to Setting the Item on the Map
Screen on page 46
m Second Maneuver Arrow*
Indicates the turning direction after next. You
can select between display and non-display.
= For more details about “Selecting display or
non-display for Second Maneuver Arrow”,
refer to Setting the Item on the Map Screen on
page 46
n POI icon
The POI icon may appear on the enlarged
map of the intersection (when available data
exists).
o Suggested lane information*
The traveling direction screen is displayed
when you approach a interchange, junction,
or exit. The suggested lane is indicated with a
green arrow.

Scroll the map to the location
you want to see
Touching anywhere on the map changes the
map to “Scroll mode” and the map begins
scrolling in the direction you touched. The
scrolling stops when you release your finger
from the screen. Pressing MAP button returns
you to the map of your surroundings.
p Touch the area close to the center of the
screen to scroll slowly; touch near the sides
of the screen to scroll quickly.

Chapter

How to Read the Map Display
1 2

Touch

Information for a specified location appears.

1 Scroll cursor
The position of scroll cursor shows the location selected on the current map.

p When the scale is 0.25 mile (200 m) or
lower, the road appears light blue in the
vicinity of the scroll cursor.
2 Direction line
This is the line connecting between the current location and the scroll cursor.
The direction towards the scroll cursor is indicated with a straight line.
3 Distance from the current location
This shows the distance in a straight line between the location indicated by the scroll cursor and your current location.
4 Street name, city name, area name and
other information for this location
(The information displayed varies according to
the scale.)
Touching on the right displays hidden text.
5 Current location key
Touching
returns you to the map of your
current location.

Viewing the information of a
specified location
An icon appears at registered places (home location, specific places, Address Book entries)
and places where there is a POI icon or traffic
information icon. Place the scroll cursor over
the icon to view detailed information.
1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cursor to the icon you want to view.

The information shown varies according to the
location. (There may be no information for that
location.)
= For more details about “Registering places”,
refer to Registering Locations Overview on
page 58
= For more details about “Displaying facilities
(POI) icon on the map”, refer to Displaying POI
on the Map on page 49
= For more details about “Icons for traffic information”, refer to Traffic event icon and line
on page 66
p

appears when the Bluetooth unit
(sold separately) is connected to the navigation system together with the cellular
phone. By touching
, you can make a
phone call to the displayed phone number.
= For details, refer to Dialing from the map
on page 83

3 Touch [Back].
Returns to the previous display.
4 Touch .
Returns to the map of your surroundings.
p You can also return to the map of your surroundings by pressing MAP button.

Chapter

How to Read the Map Display
Shortcut menu

% When the map is displayed, touch

Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of
the scroll cursor.
= For details, refer to Finding a POI in the Vicinity on page 53
: Overlay POI
Displays icons for surrounding facilities (POI)
on the map.
= For details, refer to Displaying POI on the
Map on page 49
: Volume
Displays [Volume].
= For more details about “Volume”, refer to
Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone on
page 88
: Phone Book
Displays [Phone Book].
= For details, refer to Calling a number in the
phone book on page 82
= For details, refer to Editing the entry in
“Phone Book” on page 84
: Menu Close
Hides the Shortcut menu.

How to Read the Map Display

Shortcuts allow you to perform various tasks,
such as route calculation for the location indicated by the scroll cursor or registering a location in [Address Book], faster than using the
navigation menu.
You can customize the shortcuts displayed on
screen. The shortcuts described here are prepared as the default setting.
= For more details about “Changing a shortcut”, refer to Selecting the Shortcut on page 48
p When the Bluetooth unit (sold separately)
is connected to the navigation system, you
can use shortcuts related to phone functions.
p Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot
be removed from Shortcut menu.

Shortcut menu

: Route Options*
Displayed when the map is not scrolled. This
item can be selected only during route guidance.
You can modify the conditions for route calculation and recalculate the current route.
= For details, refer to Modifying the Route Calculation Conditions on page 34
: Destination*
Displayed when the map is scrolled. Set the
route to the place specified with the scroll cursor.
: Registration
Register information on the location indicated
by the scroll cursor to the Address Book.
= For details, refer to Registering a Location
into “Address Book” on page 59
: Vicinity Search

Chapter

Modifying Map Configurations

CAUTION
For safety reasons, these functions are not available while your vehicle is in motion. To enable
these functions, you must stop in a safe place
and put on the parking brake before setting your
route (Refer to To ensure safe driving on page 22).

Entering the Map Menu
1 Press MENU button to display the navigation menu.
2

Touch [Map] to display the Map menu.

3 Change the setting.
= For more details about “Adjusting each
item”, refer to Chapter 5
p This section describes the details of the setting for each item. Settings marked with an
asterisk (*) show that these are default or
factory settings.

Displays the close up view with the 2D map.
! 3D:
Displays the close up view with [Driver’s
View].
! [Off]:
Does not display the close up view.

City Map
You can select whether to display the city map
when in certain metropolitan city areas.
! [On]*:
Automatically switches to the city map
when in a city map area.
! [Off]:
Does not show the city map.
p Even if you switch [City Map] to [On],
city map cannot display in areas where
there is no city map data.

Tracking Display
You can trace locations that you have already
passed with white dots on the route.

Setting the Item on the
Map Screen
1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu,
then touch [Displayed Info].
The Displayed Info screen appears.

On this screen, you can operate the following
items.
2

To finish the setting, touch [OK].

Close Up View
You can select the method to display the close
up view of the intersection.
! 2D*:

! On (Always):
Displays tracking for all journeys.
! On (This journey):
Displays tracking dots but erases them
when the navigation system is turned off
(when turning off the engine of your vehicle).
! [Off]:
Does not display tracking dots.

Show Mute Button
Selects whether to display or hide the voice
guidance mute key on the map.

Chapter

Modifying Map Configurations

05
Hides the Bluetooth Connected icon on
the map.
= For more details about “Bluetooth Connected icon”, refer to How to view the map
of the current location on page 38

Show Traffic Incident
Selects whether to display or hide the traffic
notification icons on the map when incidents
occur on your route.
= For details, refer to Checking traffic information manually on page 68
! View*:
Displays the icons on the map.
! Hide:
Hides the icons on the map.
p The notification icons will not be available when your vehicle deviates from
the route.

! [On]*:
Displays the Address Book Icon on the
map.
! [Off]:
Hides the Address Book Icon on the map.
p Even if [Address Book Icon] is set to
[Off], the alarm sounds when you approach the registered location and the
set image pops up. To turn off the sound
output and image pop up, select
[No Sound] and [No Picture] for the
entry.
= For details, refer to Editing the entry in
“Address Book” on page 60

3D Landmark
You can select whether to display the 3D Landmark on the map.

Modifying Map Configurations

! View*:
Displays the voice guidance mute key on
the map.
! Hide:
Hides the voice guidance mute key on the
map.

Address Book Icon
You can select whether to display the Address
Book Icon on the map.

Second Maneuver Arrow
Selects whether to display or hide the second
turn ahead of the vehicle on the map (except
for [Route View]).
= For details, refer to How to view the map of
the current location on page 38
! View*:
Displays the second turn ahead of the vehicle on the map.
! Hide:
Hides the second turn ahead of the vehicle
on the map.

Bluetooth Connected
Selects whether to display or hide the icon for
current status of the phone connection via
Bluetooth wireless technology.

p 3D Landmark only appears when the view
mode is [3D Twin Map View] and the map
scale is set to 0.25 mile (200 m) or lower.
! [On]*:
Displays the 3D Landmark on the map.
! [Off]:
Hides the 3D Landmark on the map.

! View*:
Displays the Bluetooth Connected icon on
the map.
! Hide:

Chapter

Modifying Map Configurations
Selecting the Shortcut
Select shortcuts to display on the map screen.
In the list displayed on screen, the items with
red checks are displayed on the map screen.
Touch the shortcut you want to display and
then touch [OK] when a red check appears.
You can select up to five shortcuts.
1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu,
then touch [Short-Cut Selection].
The Short-Cut Selection screen appears.

On this screen, you can operate the following
items.
2 Touch the item that you want to set in
the shortcut menu.
An item with a red check mark is displayed in
the shortcut menu.
: Registration*
Register the information on the location indicated by the scroll cursor to the Address book.
= For details, refer to Registering a Location
into “Address Book” on page 59
: Vicinity Search*
Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of
the scroll cursor.
= For details, refer to Finding a POI in the Vicinity on page 53
: Overlay POI*
Displays icon for surrounding facilities (POI)
on the map.
= For details, refer to Displaying POI on the
Map on the next page
: Volume*
Displays [Volume].
= For more details about “Volume”, refer to
Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone on
page 88
: Phone Book*

Displays [Phone Book].
= For details, refer to Calling a number in the
phone book on page 82
= For details, refer to Editing the entry in
“Phone Book” on page 84
: Dial Favorite 1 to Dial Favorite 5
Make a call to the phone number registered in
[Dial Favorites].
= For details, refer to Registering a phone
number in “Dial Favorites” on page 84
: Whole Route Overview
Displays the entire route (currently set).
= For details, refer to Checking the entire route
overview on the map on page 36
: Stock Info
Displays stock prices.
= For details, refer to Displaying stock prices
on page 70
: Set My Favorites
Displays the screen of storing browsable item
for XM tuner.
= For details, refer to Storing browsable information on page 70
: My Favorites
Displays information on your favorite browsable item for XM tuner.
= For details, refer to Displaying favorite browsable Information on page 71
: Traffic On Route
Displays a list of traffic information on the
route.
= For details, refer to Confirming traffic information on the map on page 66
: Traffic Events
Displays a list of traffic events information.
= For details, refer to Checking all traffic information on page 65
: Day/Night Display
Switches Day/Night Display setting.
= For details, refer to Setting the Map Color
Change between Day and Night on page 50
: Address Book Icon Display
Switches Address Book Icon Display setting.
= For details, refer to Setting the Item on the
Map Screen on page 46
3

To finish the setting, touch [OK].

Chapter

Modifying Map Configurations
Displaying POI on the Map
Displays icons for the surrounding facilities
(POI) on the map.

7 To finish the selection, touch [OK].
= For details, refer to Viewing the information
of a specified location on page 44

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu,
then touch [Overlay POI].

Viewing the Map Color Legend

You can browse the type of the roads and
areas displayed on the map.

Touch [Display] to turn it [On].

3 Touch the category you want to display.
4

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu,
then touch [Map Legend].
2

Touch the type which you want to see.

Touch [Select Detail].

3 Touch or to switch to the next page
or previous page.

Modifying Map Configurations

p If you do not want to display the POI icon
on the map, touch [Display] to turn it [Off].
(Even if [Display] is turned [Off], the POI
selection setting is retained.)

[Select All]:
Selects all detailed categories that are included in that category. (E.g. all categories of
restaurants including Japanese and fast food.)
[Deselect All]:
Deselects the selected category.
5

Touch the desired detailed category.
p You can select up to 100 items from the detailed category.

On this screen, you can operate the following
items.
[Day]:
You can check the color of the Day screen.
[Night]:
You can check the color of the Night screen.
p To return the previous screen, touch
[Back].

Categories that are already set will have a red
check mark.
6 Touch [OK].
Returns previous screen.

Changing the View Mode
for the Navigation Map
You can change the map display mode.
p You cannot perform this operation in
“Scroll mode”.

Chapter

Modifying Map Configurations

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu,
then touch [View Mode].

Touch [Map] in the navigation menu.

Setting the Map Color Change
between Day and Night

2 Touch [AV Guide Mode] to change the
setting.
Each time you touch the key changes that setting.
[On]*:
Switches from the audio operation screen to
the navigation screen.
[Off]:
Does not switch the screen.

To improve the visibility of the map during the
evening, you can set the timing for changing
the combination of the map color.

Changing the Map Color

You can set the map color to bluish or reddish.

2 Touch the type that you want to set.
= For details, refer to How to Use the Map on
page 38

Touch [Map] in the navigation menu.

2 Touch [Day/Night Display] to change
the setting.
Each time you touch the key changes that setting.
[Automatic]*:
You can change the colors of a map between
daytime and nighttime according to whether
the vehicle lights are On or Off.
[Day]:
The map is always displayed with daytime colors.
p To use this function with [Automatic], the
Orange/white lead of the navigation system
must be connected correctly.
p You can also change the brightness of the
screen between daytime and nighttime with
[Dimmer].
= For details, refer to Operating the picture
adjustment on page 153

Changing the Setting of
Navigation Interruption
Screen
Set whether to automatically switch to the navigation screen from the AV screen when your
vehicle approaches a guidance point such as
an intersection while displaying a screen other
than navigation.

Touch [Map] in the navigation menu.

2 Touch [Road Color] to change the setting.
Each time you touch the key changes that setting.
[Blue]:
Changes to blue based map colors.
[Red]*:
Changes to red based map colors.
p Check the color change with [Map
Legend].

Chapter

Setting a Route to Your Destination

CAUTION
For safety reasons, these route-setting functions
are not available while your vehicle is in motion.
To enable these functions, you must stop in a
safe place and put on the parking brake before
setting your route (Refer to To ensure safe driving
on page 22).

Searching for Points of
Interest (POI) Statewide
Information about various facilities (Points Of
Interest - POI), such as gas stations, amusement parks, or restaurants, is available. By entering the POI Name, you can search for a
POI.
p You can also narrow down the search
range by initially specifying the name of the
city where your destination is located and
also by initially specifying the category.
p Use the functions [POI Search] and [Vicinity Search] in different situations. In [POI
Search], the distance is not limited within
the selected state or province, but in [Vicinity Search], the distance for the search is
limited to within a 16 km (10 miles) radius.
The following three methods are available for
searching facilities by POI:
! Searching for POIs by specifying a category
first
! Searching for POIs by specifying a city name
first
! Searching for a POI directly from the name of
the facilities

Searching for a POI directly
from the name of the facilities
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [POI Search].
2 Touch the state code key of the destination and select the state or province (or territory).
= For more details about “Selecting the state
or province where you want to search”, refer to
Calculating your destination by using Address
Search on page 28
3

Input the name of the facilities.

[City]:
Touch to specify the destination city or area,
and then input the city name. (This is available
only when [Name] is blank.)
[Category]:
Touch to specify the POI category. (This is
available only when [Name] and [City] are
blank.)
[List]:
Lists candidates based on the yellow characters in the text box (suggested characters in
white are invalid). Touch the desired facility in
the list to proceed to the next step.

Setting a Route to Your Destination

p Some information on traffic regulations depends on the time when the route calculation is performed. Thus, the information
may not correspond with a certain traffic
regulation when your vehicle actually
passes the location. Also, the information
on the traffic regulations provided will be
for a passenger vehicle, and not for a truck
or other delivery vehicles. Always follow the
actual traffic regulations when driving.

p When the options are narrowed down to six
or less, a list of the matching facilities automatically appears. When you enter the
same characters that were entered previously, the system automatically displays
the character string that follows the entered
characters. (Auto fill-in function)
= For details, refer to Auto fill-in function
on page 30
p If less than six POIs in a detailed category
are available, the screen for inputting the
POI name is skipped.

Chapter

Setting a Route to Your Destination
name and street name, touch to set the POI
as your destination.

Please proceed to Step 4.

4 Touch
.
Touching
sorts the items in the list in
the order of distance.

Searching for POIs by
specifying a category first
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [POI Search].

:
Sorts the items in the list in the alphabetical
order.
p You can use this sort function only when
there are 2 000 or less candidates.

2 Touch the state code key of the destination and select the state or province (or territory).
= For more details about “Selecting the state
or province where you want to search”, refer to
Calculating your destination by using Address
Search on page 28
3

Touch [Category].

5 Touch the desired POI for your destination.

p Icons are helpful for quickly telling the category of facilities with the same name.

When the route is not set, route calculation
starts immediately.
= For details, refer to Checking and modifying
the route on page 32
When the route is already set, “Location confirmation screen” is shown.
= For details, refer to Checking the location
on the map on page 31
p Touching
displays a map of the surroundings of the selected POI.
p If the selected POI is the name of a chain of
outlets and consequently the same store
name applies to different locations (the
number of outlets appears next to the
chain’s name), touch the name of the POI
to display a list of those POIs with city

Category

Touch the desired category.

[Name]:
Touch if you want to first specify the POI
name.
[City]:
Touch if you want to first specify the destination city or area.
[Back]:
Return the Destination menu.
5 Touch the detailed category.
If the category is not sub-divided into more detailed categories, the list will not be displayed.

Chapter

Setting a Route to Your Destination
Proceed to Step 6.
6 Input the name of the facilities.
You can also narrow down the candidates by
specifying the city before the name input.
= For more details about “Subsequent Operations (“Searching for a POI directly from the
name of the facilities”)”, refer to Searching for
POIs by specifying a category first on the previous page

5 Input the name of the facilities.
You can also narrow down the candidates by
specifying the category before the name input.
= For more details about “Subsequent Operations (“Searching for a POI directly from the
name of the facilities”)”, refer to Searching for
POIs by specifying a category first on the previous page

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [POI Search].
2 Touch the state code key of the destination and select the state or province (or territory).
= For more details about “Selecting the state
or province where you want to search”, refer to
Calculating your destination by using Address
Search on page 28
3

Touch [City].

Searching for the facilities
around the current position
You can search for Points Of Interest in your
surroundings. Use this function to find a POI
to visit during a journey. Searching range is
approximately 10 miles (16 km) square from
the current location.
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Vicinity Search].
The list of POI categories appears.
2

Touch the desired category.
Category

4 Input the name of the city that has the
facility you want to search for.

p Auto fill-in function is available.
= For details, refer to Auto fill-in function
on page 30

A list of cities that include the entered characters appear.
[List]:
Lists candidates based on the yellow characters in the text box (suggested characters in
white are invalid). Touch the desired city in the
list to proceed to the next step.

Setting a Route to Your Destination

Finding a POI in the Vicinity
Searching for POIs by
specifying a city name first

Previously set categories will have a red check
mark. When only a few types of the detailed
categories are selected, blue check marks will
appear.
[OK]:
Start search with the selected category.
[Back]:
Returns to the previous screen.
[Set]:
Displays the screen for registering POI shortcuts.
= For details, refer to Registering/deleting POI
Shortcuts on page 56

Chapter

Setting a Route to Your Destination

p If you touch one of the POI shortcuts (e.g.
) before selecting a category on the
list, you can start searching for facilities directly by the category registered on the POI
shortcut.
p If you want to search for facilities by using
both marked category and POI shortcuts,
select some categories in the list and then
touch the POI shortcut to start searching.

Names of POIs and their distance from your
current location appear. They are listed in
order from nearest to farthest. To the left of
each item is an icon indicating the category.

Touch [Select Detail].
Distance to the facility

Touch the desired detailed category.

8 Touch the desired POI to set your destination.
When the route is not set, route calculation
starts immediately.
= For details, refer to Checking and modifying
the route on page 32
When the route is already set, “Location confirmation screen” is shown.
= For details, refer to Calculating your destination by using Address Search on page 28
p When you touch , the POIs around the
specified location are shown on a map.

Searching for the facilities
around the scroll cursor

Previously set categories will have a red check
mark.
5 Touch [Back].
Returns to the previous screen.
6 Repeat Step 2 to 5 to select a category.
You can select up to 100 items from the detailed categories.
7 Touch [OK].
The POI in the selected category and subcategory are searched.

Searching range is approximately 10 miles
(16 km) square from the scroll cursor.
p This can be used when Vicinity Search is
selected in Short-Cut Selection.
= For more details about “Changing a
shortcut”, refer to Selecting the Shortcut on
page 48
1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cursor to the place where you want to search
for POI.
2 Touch .
The shortcut menu appears.

Chapter

Setting a Route to Your Destination
3 Touch
.
For more details about “following operations”,
refer to Step 2 of Searching for the facilities
around the current position on page 53

Searching for Your
Destination by Specifying
the Telephone Number
If you know the telephone number of your destination, you can quickly search for your destination by specifying the telephone number.
p You can also search for the phone number
[Phone #] on [Address Book].
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Telephone Search].
The telephone number entry screen appears.
2

Input a telephone number.

= For details, refer to Checking and modifying
the route on page 32
When the route is already set, “Location confirmation screen” is shown.
= For details, refer to Calculating your destination by using Address Search on page 28
p If there is more than one place for the number input, a list of those places is displayed.
Touch the item you want in the list.

Route Calculation to Your
Home Location or to Your
Favorite Location
If your home location is registered, the route
home can be calculated by touching a single
key from the navigation menu. Also, you can
register one location, such as your workplace,
as your favorite location, and the route is calculated in a similar way.
= For details, refer to Registering your home
and your favorite location on page 58
% Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Return Home] or
[Go to].
When the route is not set, route calculation
starts immediately.
= For details, refer to Checking and modifying
the route on page 32
When the route is already set, “Location confirmation screen” is shown.
= For details, refer to Calculating your destination by using Address Search on page 28

Setting a Route to Your Destination

p The distance indicated in the search result
is the distance from the scroll cursor to the
facility.
p The bottom icon is for shortcuts to your favorite categories. Touching the shortcuts
icon displays a list of the facilities in a category.
= For details, refer to Registering/deleting
POI Shortcuts on the next page
p [Vicinity Search] in the navigation menu
searches your surroundings. On the other
hand, in the case of
in the Shortcut
menu (= Refer to Shortcut menu on page
45), the area around the scroll cursor after
the map is scrolled will be searched.

When the route is not set, route calculation
starts immediately.

Chapter

Setting a Route to Your Destination

Selecting Destination from
“Destination History” and
“Address Book”
Any place that has been searched before is
stored in Destination History. Places that you
have registered manually, such as your home,
are stored in Address Book. Simply select the
place you want to go to from the list and a
route to that place will be calculated.
= For more details about “Operation of the
Address Book”, refer to Viewing “Address
Book” on page 60
= For more details about “Information on Destination History”, refer to Operating “Destination History” on page 64
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Address Book] or
[Destination History].
2

gistration and deletion are almost the same
as described below.

Registering a POI shortcut
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Vicinity Search].
2

Touch [Set].

Displays a list of already registered POI shortcuts.
3

Touch [Add].

Touch your destination name.

Displays a POI category list.
When a route is not set, route calculation
starts immediately.
= For details, refer to Checking and modifying
the route on page 32
When a route is already set, “Location confirmation screen” is shown.
= For details, refer to Checking the location
on the map on page 31
p You can also see the destination by touching
on the right of the list.

Touch a category.

Touch the POI selection method.

Registering/deleting POI
Shortcuts
You can register up to six shortcuts as your favorite POI. You can also change or delete the
registered shortcuts.
p You can register a POI shortcut by touching
on the Shortcut-menu. The steps for re-

[Select All]:

Chapter

Setting a Route to Your Destination

Selects all detailed categories that are included in that category. (E.g. all categories of
restaurants including Japanese and fast food.)
[Select Detail]:
Selects one of the detailed categories. Touching a category adds that category to the shortcuts.

Deleting a POI shortcut

Setting a Route to Your Destination

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Vicinity Search].
Touch [Set].

3 Touch [Delete].
Displays a list of already registered POI shortcuts.
4 Touch the category to be deleted.
A red check appears on the selected shortcut.
[All], [None]:
A red check will appear or disappear on all registered categories.
5 Touch [Delete].
Deletes the selected shortcut from the list.

Chapter

Registering and Editing Locations

Registering Locations
Overview
Registering places you visit frequently saves
time and effort. Also, routes to registered locations can be calculated easily by touching the
corresponding touch panel key. This registered
location information can also be modified. The
registered location appears on the map as an
icon.
The registered locations are categorized
into the following three types:
!
: Home location:
Register your home location here. Once
your home location is registered, the route
to your home can be set by simply touching
[Return Home] in Destination menu. Only
one location can be registered.
!
: Favorite location:
Register a point that you frequently visit
(for example, your office) here. Once your
favorite location is registered, a route to
your favorite location can be set by simply
touching [Go to] in Destination menu.
Only one location can be registered.
!
: (default): Address Book entry:
Register other points you often visit here.
Once locations are registered, you can set
the route by selecting an item from Address Book.
p The items in Address Book are automatically updated in alphabetic order. However,
“Home location” and “Favorite location”
always appear at the top (if you registered
them).
p Selects whether to display or hide all of the
registered location icons on the map.
= For details, refer to Setting the Item on
the Map Screen on page 46

Registering your home and
your favorite location
You can register one home location and one
favorite location. You can change the registered information later. You might find it useful
to register your workplace or a relative’s home
as your favorite location.
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Defined Locations].
2 Touch [Go to].
When registering your home location, touch
[Home].

3 Search for a location to register.
You can select a method of location search.

= For more details about “Address Search”,
refer to Calculating your destination by using
Address Search on page 28
= For more details about “Information on
searching locations to register”, refer to Chapter 6
p If you select [Map Search], move the scroll
cursor to the place you want to set and
touch [OK].

4 Point the scroll cursor to the location
you want to register and touch [OK].
The location is registered, and the Edit registered information screen appears.
= For details, refer to Editing the entry in “Address Book” on page 60
5 Touch [OK].
Completes the registration.

Chapter

Registering and Editing Locations
Registering a Location into
“Address Book”

Touch [Add].

Address Book can store up to 400 registered
locations. These can include your home location, favorite places, and destinations you
have already registered.

Registering a location by scroll
mode

3 Select the search method, search the location, and display the map.

1 Scroll to the location you want to register.

4 When the map of the location you
want to register is displayed, touch [OK].

Display the shortcut menu, and touch
.

The location is registered, and the Edit registered information screen appears.
= For details, refer to Editing the entry in “Address Book” on the next page
The location is registered, and the Edit registered information screen appears.
= For details, refer to Editing the entry in “Address Book” on the next page

Registering and Editing Locations

You can perform the following operation when
[Registration] is selected in [Short-Cut Selection].

5 Touch [OK].
Completes the registration.

3 Touch [OK].
Completes the registration.

Registering a location by
“Address Book”
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Address Book].

Chapter

Registering and Editing Locations
Viewing “Address Book”
% Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Address Book].
4 5
1
2
3

6
7
8
9
a
b

1 Home location:
The item displayed with the
icon is the
home location. Touch to calculate the route.
= For details, refer to Registering your home
and your favorite location on page 58
2 Favorite location:
The item displayed with the
icon is the
favorite location. Touch to calculate the
route.
= For details, refer to Registering your home
and your favorite location on page 58
3 Address Book entry:
Touch to calculate the route.
4
:
A map of that location can be displayed.
= For details, refer to Checking the location on the map on page 31
5
:
The information related to that place can be
edited.
= For details, refer to Editing the entry in
“Address Book” on this page
6
:
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.
This is the default sorting order.
p Active if there are items in the list and
current sort is not alphabetically.
7
:
Sorts the items in the list in order of the distance from the vehicle position.
p Active if there are items in the list and
current sort is not by distance form current position.
8
:

Sorts the items in the list in order of the recently used items.
p Active if there are items in the list and
current sort is not by last used.
9 [Add]:
The screen for selecting the method for registering the location in Address Book appears.
= For details, refer to Registering a Location
into “Address Book” on the previous page
a [Delete]:
Deletes the registered locations.
= For details, refer to Deleting the entry in
“Address Book” on page 63
b [Back]:
Returns previous screen.

Editing the entry in “Address Book”
In the Address Book menu, touching
on
the right-hand side of the location displays the
Edit registered information screen.
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Address Book].
2 Touch
on the right-hand side of the
location that you want to edit the information for.
1
2
3
4
8

6 5

1 Name
You can enter the desired name.
2 Pronunciation
You can enter the desired pronunciation independently from the name. The registered
pronunciation is used for voice recognition.
p If nothing is entered in the text box, you
cannot use that item as a voice command.

Chapter

Registering and Editing Locations

8
Only when the Bluetooth unit (sold separately) is connected to the navigation system and a cellular phone featuring
Bluetooth technology is also connected,
you can make a phone call to the registered
phone number 3 by touching
.
= For details, refer to Dialing the entry in
the Address Book on page 82

When you approach a registered location
while traveling
When a location with a registered sound effect
and image comes within an approx. 0.19 mile

(300 m) radius from the vehicle position, the
sound effect plays and the image appears.

Changing a name
No sounds can be output during

1 Touch [Name], then touch [Yes].
The message confirming whether or not to
register the entered name as voice command
is displayed.
When not registering a name as a voice command, select [No].
2

Enter a new name, then touch [OK].

Registering and Editing Locations

p Depending on which language is being
switched to, you may not be able to use
the registered pronunciation without
modification.
= For details, refer to Available Voice Commands on page 159
Phone #
The phone number of the registered location. You can dial this number by using 8.
p You can search by registered telephone
number.
Icon
The symbol displayed on the map and Address Book.
p Selects whether to display or hide all of
the registered location icons on the
map.
= For details, refer to Setting the Item
on the Map Screen on page 46
Picture
As you approach the location, the registered image appears.
You can register the picture stored in the
navigation system. You can also import and
register a picture shot from a digital camera
by using a CD-ROM.
Sound
The selected sound is played when you approach the location.
Modify Location
You can change the registered location by
scrolling the map.

The current name appears in the text box. Delete the current name, and enter a new name
between 1 and 23 characters long.
p Touch [Small] to enter lowercase letters.
Touch [Caps.] to enter uppercase letters.
Touch to toggle the selection.

3 If the pronunciation is suitable, touch
[Yes].
The details you set are registered, and the Address Book menu appears.
Alternative options:
[No]:
Completes the registration without editing the
pronunciation.
[Repeat]:

Chapter

Registering and Editing Locations

p You cannot change the pronunciation of
your home.
p If nothing is entered in the text box, you
cannot use that item as the voice commands.

You can reconfirm the pronunciation of the
name you entered.
p If the pronunciation is not the desired one,
edit the characters so that the pronunciation matches your desired pronunciation.
p When you confirm the pronunciation,
is
shown on the left side of the location name
displayed in “Address Book menu”. This
icon indicates that this name can be used
as a voice command during voice operation.
p You cannot change the name of your home.

Entering or changing a phone number
1

2 Input a phone number, then touch
[OK].
The Address Information menu appears.
p To change a registered phone number, delete the existing number and then enter a
new one.

Changing a pronunciation
No sounds can be output during

Touch [Phone #].

Selecting an icon to appear on the map
1

Touch [Pronunciation].

2 Enter a new pronunciation, then touch
[OK].
The current pronunciation appears in the text
box (if already set). Delete the current pronunciation, and enter a new pronunciation between 1 and 23 characters long.
3 If the pronunciation is suitable, touch
[Yes].
The details you set are registered, and the Address Book menu appears.
Alternative options:
[No]:
Cancels the editing.
[Repeat]:
You can reconfirm the pronunciation of the
name you entered.
p If the pronunciation is not the desired one,
edit the characters so that the pronunciation matches your desired pronunciation.
p When you confirm the pronunciation,
is
shown on the left side of the location name
displayed in the Address Book menu. This
mark indicates that this name can be used
as a voice command during voice operation.

p Selects whether to display or hide all of the
registered location icons on the map.
= For details, refer to Setting the Item on the
Map Screen on page 46
1

Touch [Icon].

2 Touch the icon that you want to appear
on the map.

The Address Information menu appears.
p You cannot change the icon of your home
and your favorite location.
p If you set
(dot), the registered name of
that entry can be displayed on the map. The
registered name does not appear if [Address Book Icon Display] is set to [Off].

Chapter

Registering and Editing Locations
1

Customizing the picture
Be sure to read “Limitations for importing pictures” before creating a CD-R (-RW).
= For details, refer to Limitations for importing
pictures on page 94

Touch [Sound].
Select the desired sound.
p To turn off the sound, select [No Sound].

Touch [Sound] to hear the sound.

Touch [Set].

Changing the position of locations
1 Touch [Modify Location].
The map of the selected area and its surroundings appears.
2 Touch the screen to change its position,
then touch [OK].

Touch a picture you want to set.
p To cancel displaying the picture, select
[No Picture].

4 Touch [Yes].
On this screen, you can select the following
items:
[No]:
Select when you want to change to another
picture.
Return to Step 3.

Deleting the entry in “Address
Book”
Items registered in Address Book can be deleted. All entries of the data in Address Book
can be deleted at once.

Registering and Editing Locations

You can customize a picture for the Address
Book entry. Some pictures are already stored
in the hard disk drive, and you can also import
JPEG format pictures, such as a picture from
your digital camera, by using a CD-R (-RW).
You can use pictures by burning them onto a
CD-R (-RW) with your PC and inserting it into
the navigation system.
Here, a method for changing the picture is described with an example of loading a picture
stored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the navigation
system.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Address Book].
2 Touch [Delete].
“Delete from Address Book” screen appears.
3 Select the location you want to delete.
A check mark appears by the selected location.

Selecting sound
No sounds can be output during

Chapter

Registering and Editing Locations

On this screen, you can select the following
items:
[All]:
Selects all entries.
[None]:
Displayed when all locations are selected.
Cancels all selected locations.
4

Touch [Delete].

5 Select [Yes].
The data you selected is deleted.
Alternative option:
[No]:
Cancels the deletion and returns to Step 4.
p Because deleted data cannot be restored,
take extra care not to delete by mistake.

Deleting the entry in
“Destination History”
Items in Destination History can be deleted.
All entries in Destination History can be deleted at once.
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Destination History].
2 Touch [Delete].
“Delete from History” screen appears.
3 Select the location you want to delete.
A check mark appears by the selected location.

Operating “Destination History”
The points to which a route has been calculated in the past are automatically saved in
Destination History.
p If no location is stored in Destination History, you cannot select [Destination History]. (If you perform a route calculation,
you can select [Destination History].)
% Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Destination History].

On this screen, you can select the following
items:
[All]:
Selects all entries.
[None]:
Displayed when all locations are selected.
Cancels all selected locations.
4

2
3
1

1 Destination history:
Touch to calculate the route.
2 [Delete]:
Deletes the selected history.
3 [Back]:
Returns to the previous screen.

Touch [Delete].

Chapter

Using Traffic Information

Using XM NavTraffic
Information

incidents have occurred, their location and
their distance from your current position.

If you have a GEX-P10XMT XM Digital Satellite
Data & Audio Receiver (sold separately) attached to the navigation system and have an
active subscription to XM NavTraffic service,
you can view current traffic conditions and information on your navigation display. When
the unit receives updated traffic information,
the navigation system will overlay the traffic information on your map and also display detailed text information when available. When
you are traveling along a route and there is
traffic information on your current route, the
system will detect it and ask you if you would
like to be rerouted, or suggest another route
automatically.
p The system acquires the traffic information
up to 100 miles in radius from the vehicle
position. (If there is a lot of traffic information around your vehicle, the radius will be
shorter than 100 miles.)
p The navigation system provides the following functions by using the information
from XM NavTraffic:
— Displaying a list of traffic information
— Displaying traffic information on a map
— Suggesting a route to avoid traffic congestion by using traffic information
p The term “traffic congestion” in this section
indicates the following types of traffic information: stop and go, stopped traffic,
closed/blocked roads. This information is
always taken into consideration when
checking your route, and the information
related with these events cannot be turned
off. If you select other traffic information in
[Traffic Settings], the information can be
displayed in a list or on a map.
= For details, refer to Selecting traffic information to display on page 69

Checking all traffic information

Traffic Information is displayed on screen in a
list. This allows you to check how many traffic

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Traffic Events].
The list with received traffic information is
shown.
2 Touch or to view the incident list.
Places (street names) where incidents have
occurred are displayed in the list.
3

1
2
3
4
5

Street or place
Direction
Incident
Distance to the location
The incident numbers currently displayed and the total number of incidents
p The incidents that have already been
read will be displayed in white. Unread
incidents will be in yellow.
6 Sort key
:
You can sort the traffic information in alphabetical order.
:
You can sort the traffic information by distance from your current position.
For the list displayed when you touch [Traffic Events], the list will be sorted according
to the linear distance from the vehicle position to the traffic information.

Using Traffic Information

Viewing traffic list

Traffic information except traffic flow information is displayed onscreen in a list.

Chapter

Using Traffic Information
For the list displayed when you touch [Traffic On Route], the list will be sorted according to the distance from the vehicle position
to the traffic information.
:
You can sort the traffic information according to the incident.
The list will be sorted in the order of closed/
blocked roads, traffic congestion, accidents, road works and others.
:
When new traffic information is received,
current information is changed or old information has been removed, the list is updated to reflect the new situation.
7

p The method for checking the content displayed on the screen is the same for
“Checking all traffic information”.

Checking traffic flow information on
the list
The traffic flow information can also be displayed as an onscreen list.
% Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Traffic Flow].
The list with the traffic flow information is
shown.
(mph):
You can sort the traffic information by the average speed.

Touching allows you to check the location on a map. (Traffic information without
positional information cannot be checked
on a map.)

p The other methods for checking the traffic
flow information displayed on screen is the
same for “Checking all traffic information”.

3 Select an incident you want to view in
detail.
The details of the selected incident are displayed.

Confirming traffic information
on the map

p Touching an incident you want to see allows
you to view the detailed information of the
incident. If the information cannot be displayed on one screen, touch or to view
the remaining information.

4 Touch [Back] to return to the list with
traffic information.
A list with traffic information appears again.

Checking traffic information on the
route

p A line displayed only when the map scale is
2.5 miles (5 km) or lower.
p Icon appears only when the scale on the
map is 10 miles (20 km) or lower. If the
scale is changed, the icons are resized according to the selected scale.

Traffic event icon and line
The traffic event information displayed on the
map is as follows.
Traffic event icon

All traffic information on the current route (including traffic flow information) is displayed
onscreen in a list.
% Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Traffic On Route].
The currently set traffic information on the
route appears on the screen.

with yellow line:
Stop and go traffic
with red line:
Stopped traffic

Chapter

Using Traffic Information
with black line:
Closed/blocked roads
etc.:
For the meaning of the icon, see [Traffic Settings] in the Information menu.
= For details, refer to Selecting traffic information to display on page 69
If you want to check the traffic information details on the map, move the scroll cursor onto
an icon such as
and touch . This allows
you to view place names and other detail information.

Traffic flow information icon and line

Traffic flow icon

Red: average speed in this area is between
5 mph to 15 mph (8 km/h to 24 km/h)
Yellow: average speed in this area is between
20 mph to 40 mph (32 km/h to 64 km/h)
Green: average speed in this area is 45 mph
(72 km/h) or faster (An icon without a number
indicates the average speed of the road is
more than 45 mph (72 km/h))
p The traffic flow line can be used only when
[Traffic Settings] is selected.
= For details, refer to Selecting traffic information to display on page 69
If you want to check the traffic information details at the map, move the scroll cursor onto

an icon such as
and touch X. This allows
you to view place names and other detail information.

Setting an alternative route to
avoid traffic congestion
The navigation system checks at certain time
intervals whether or not there is the traffic information on your route. If the navigation system detects any traffic congestion on your
current route, the system tries to find a better
route in the background.
p Following types of traffic incidents on the
route will be checked: stop and go, stopped
traffic, and closed/blocked roads.
p Traffic flow information is taken into account only when [Traffic Flow] in [Traffic
Settings] is checked.

Checking for traffic congestion
automatically
If there is information about traffic congestion
on your current route and if an alternative
route can be found, the navigation system will
recommend a new alternative route automatically. In such a case, the following screen will
appear.
p There is no action if the system cannot find
any traffic congestion information on your
route or the system cannot find an alternative.

Using Traffic Information

Red, yellow, or green blinking lines may appear on either side of a road. In addition to
these blinking lines, a round icon with a number may appear on the map. The number in
the icon indicates the actual average speed of
that specific area. These colors indicate the
average speed at which traffic is flowing along
these streets. Here is a guide to the colors and
the average speed they indicate:

Difference in distance and travel time between the existing route and new route.

Distance from the current position of your vehicle to the point of entry into the new route.

Chapter

Using Traffic Information
On this screen, you can select the following
items:
New:
The recommended route is displayed on the
screen.
Current:
The current route is displayed on the screen.
OK:
The displayed route is set.
p When no selection is made, the screen returns to previous screen.

Checking traffic information manually
Touching notification icon on the map screen
allows you to check traffic information on your
route while icon is displayed. Only if there is
any traffic information on your route, notification icon is displayed on the navigation map
screen.
p The notification icon will not be available
when your vehicle deviate from the route.
p Traffic flow information is taken into account only when [Traffic Flow] in [Traffic
Settings] is checked.
1 Set [Show Traffic Incident] to [View].
= For details, refer to Setting the Item on the
Map Screen on page 46
2 Press MAP button to display the current
location.
The icon appears when the system acquires
traffic information on the current route.
3 Touch the icon while the icon is displayed.
Notification icon

The displayed icon indicates the type of the
traffic information.

4 Touch [Detour] to search for an alternative route.
p [Detour] will be enable only when the system can find “traffic congestion”.

After touching [Detour], the route is recalculated taking all traffic congestion on your current route into account.
p “Notification icon” shows the nearest traffic
information on the route. However, if you
touch [Detour], the route is recalculated by
taking into account not only this information, but also all traffic congestion information on the route.

On this screen, you can select the following
items:
[List]:
Only three proximate traffic events on your
route are listed in this traffic list.
[Back]:
The message disappears, and the map display
reappears.
For the subsequent operations, see “Checking
for traffic congestion automatically”.
= For details, refer to Checking for traffic congestion automatically on the previous page

Chapter

Using Traffic Information

Selecting traffic information to
display
There are different types of traffic information
that can be received via the XM NavTraffic service, and you can select which types will be incorporated and displayed on your navigation
system.

and go, stopped traffic, and closed/blocked
roads.

Touch [OK].

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Traffic Settings].
2 Touch [Displayed traffic information].
The names of the displayed traffic information
items and a list of icons appears on the
screen.

Using Traffic Information

3 Touch the traffic information item to
display.
A red check appears next to the selected traffic information.

p [Traffic Flow] includes not only whether or
not to display the icon on the map, but also
whether or not to take the flow information
into account when rerouting.
p Touching [All (None)] selects or deselects
all traffic information.

4 Touch [OK].
The selected traffic information icon is added
to the screen.
p The following types of traffic congestion
cannot be deselected and are always displayed and taken into consideration: stop
En

Chapter

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

Using the XM Tuner to View
Stock, Sports, and Other
Information

You can switch the upper line to input the
number and marks.
Touch to toggle the selection.
p The method for inputting the text is almost
same as for inputting street names.
= For more details about “Text input method”, refer to Operation of state selection
screen on page 29
p If the input ticker symbol does not match in
full the actual ticker symbol for the stock,
you may not be able to find it.

When an XM tuner (GEX-P10XMT) is connected, you can receive stock prices, sports,
and other information, and display it onscreen.
You may also register favorite information on
the navigation system.

Displaying stock prices
Can display the prices of up to 12 stocks.

Deleting stocks to be displayed onscreen

% Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Stock Info].

Can display the prices of up to 12 stocks. If 12
stocks are already registered, delete as many
entries as necessary to add new stocks.
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Stock Info].
2

The screen displays a list of stock prices.
p Although the stock price information displayed onscreen is updated every 30 seconds (approx.), these prices are not realtime values.

Registering stocks to be displayed
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Stock Info].
2

3 Touch the ticker of the stock you want
to delete.
A red check appears next to the ticker you
touched.
p To delete all registered stocks, touch [All].
Red checks will appear next to all tickers.

4 Touch [Delete].
A message will appear asking you to confirm
the deletion.
5

Touch [Yes].

Touch [Add].

3 Input the Ticker text for the stocks you
want to display, then touch [OK].

[0-9], [Punc.], [Oper], [Sym.]:

Touch [Delete].

Storing browsable information
XM special contents can be stored as [My Favorites] so that it can be accessed without
searching every time an update is needed.
p The displayed items depend on the information that is sent from each station.
p [My Favorites] can store up to 50 items.

Chapter

Using XM Tuner and Other Information
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Set My Favorites].
The screen will display a list of categories. The
information appearing onscreen is automatically updated at regular intervals.
2 Touch a category you want to browse
from the list.

Displaying favorite browsable
Information
You can check and delete the browsable information you registered.
1 Store the desired item (topic).
= For details, refer to Storing browsable information on the previous page
2 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [My Favorites].
A list of registered items (topics) appears on
the screen.
3

Touch an item to display the contents.

Touch an item you wish to store.

Touch [OK].

Deleting favorite browsable information
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [My Favorites].

If the storing step is successful, the confirmation screen will appear.
Touch [OK] to complete the storing and return
to the previous screen.

Touch [Delete].

Touch the items you want to delete.

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

If an item is divided into more detail categories, select the one from the list to narrow
down the category. After narrowing down, the
message confirming whether or not to register
the item.

Chapter

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

A red check appears next to the items you
touched.
p To delete all favorite contents, touch [All].
Red checks will appear next to all items.

Touch [Delete].

5 A message will appear asking you to
confirm the deletion. Touch [Yes].

Checking the Reception
Status of the XM Tuner
The current XM tuner’s (GEX-P10XMT) reception status and signal strength appear on
screen. (The information that is transmitted
via XM DATA cable is displayed in this screen.)
% Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [XM Status].
1
2
3

3 Radio ID
The radio ID appears.
p If you have subscribed to either XM
audio only or XM NavTraffic stand alone,
you will see [Updating] in [Status]. This
is because the GEX-P10XMT is constantly checking to see if you have
decided to add the other service while
your navigation system is turned on. If
you subscribe to both services, the appropriate status will be shown in
[Status].

Emergency Info
The Emergency Info screen provides important emergency information pertaining to your
vehicle, insurance, and current location. Such
emergency information could be useful in the
event of an accident or vehicle breakdown.
The accuracy of the personal information is
dependent on the accuracy of the information
entered into the navigation system by the user.

WARNING
1 Status
Depending on the XM tuner’s (GEXP10XMT) reception status, any one of the
following may appear.
OK
No problem.
Updating
Updating encryption code.
Check antenna
Improper antenna connection.
Not Connected
2 Signal Strength
Depending on the signal strength, any one
of the following may appear.
Very Strong
Strong
Marginal
Weak
No signal

The Emergency Info screen is only intended to
provide information to a driver that may be useful
during an emergency situation, and does not replace the need to call for emergency assistance,
when necessary.

Chapter

Using XM Tuner and Other Information
Checking the information
registered as Emergency Info
% Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Emergency Info].
1

3
4
5
The information registered as Emergency
Info appears on the screen.

Nationwide Auto Club, Inc., or if your free
one-year period has expired, you are subject
to charges by Signature’s Nationwide Auto
Club, Inc. You are also subject to charges
by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club, Inc.
for roadside services not included in the
Emergency Roadside Assistance service.
The terms and conditions regarding the
Emergency Roadside Assistance service
provided by Signature’s Nationwide Auto
Club, Inc. are determined solely and exclusively by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club,
Inc. Please contact Signature’s Nationwide
Auto Club, Inc. for more information. The
telephone number that appears here by default is the toll free number for this service.
For additional details on registering for this
service, please check your product registration card included with this product. If you
are not interested in the free Roadside Assistance service, this number can be edited
and replaced by your own roadside assistance telephone number.
p The police number is shown as 911 and
cannot be changed.
4 Locate Car Service
= For details, refer to Searching for car service in an emergency on the next page
5 Dial each number
= For details, refer to Dialing the corresponding number in emergency on the next
page

1 year of free Emergency Roadside Assistance service
1 year of free Emergency Roadside Assistance service is available to all registered
owners and provided by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club, Inc. The first year of Emergency Roadside Assistance service is paid
for by Pioneer only if your navigation system
is registered with Pioneer and you sign up
on-line with Signature’s Nationwide Auto
Club, Inc. at the time you register your navigation system with Pioneer. If you have not
signed up for this service with Signature’s

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

1 You are currently at:
Your current position is indicated by the
street name, latitude, and longitude.
2 Personal Information:
Your VIN number, insurance policy number,
and the telephone number of your insurance company can be displayed once entered by the user.
3 Emergency TOW service phone:
The phone number of the subscribing
Emergency TOW service can be displayed
once entered by the user. The default or factory setting is the phone number of the
Emergency Roadside Assistance service
provided by Signature’s Nationwide Auto
Club, Inc.

Chapter

Using XM Tuner and Other Information
Dialing the corresponding number in
emergency
CAUTION
This function can be valid only when all following
conditions are satisfied:
! The Bluetooth unit (sold separately) is connected with navigation system.
! The communication for Hands-free phoning is
activate between the cellular phone featuring
Bluetooth technology and the navigation system.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Emergency Info].
2 Touch
.
A list of telephone numbers appears onscreen.

a safe location. If not, or in all major accidents,
call 911.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Emergency Info].
2

Touch [Locate Car Service].

A list of auto services appears onscreen.
3 Touch the Category of the auto service
you want to use.

3 Touch the phone number you want to
dial.
The signal is transmitted to the selected
phone number.

p The Auto Service categories that can be selected in the Emergency Info are:
[Automotive] and [Car Dealer].

4
Touching

Touch the selection method.

terminates the call.

p Touch [Back] to return to the previous
screen.

Searching for car service in an
emergency
In an emergency, you can search the Emergency Info for Auto Services in the vicinity of
your current position and set the current
route.

WARNING
The Emergency Info screen is only intended to
provide information to a driver that may be useful
during an emergency situation and if they are in

[Select All]:
Selects all detailed categories included in that
category. A red check appears next to the selected category.
[Deselect All]:
Cancels the selected detailed categories.
[Select Detail]:
Selects a detailed category from the list.

Chapter

Using XM Tuner and Other Information
p If you want to search with more detailed categories, touch [Select Detail]. When the
subcategory list appears, touch the item
and touch [Back]. When only a few types of
the detailed categories are selected, blue
check marks will appear.

5 Repeat Step 3 and 4, select a category,
and touch [OK].
The POI in the selected category and detailed
category is searched.
6 Touch the name of the facility to set the
route you want.

3 Touch the desired item to register your
information.

p If information is already registered, that information will appear.

4 Input the number you wish to register,
then touch [OK].
Completes the registration.

[Edit VIN]
Register your Vehicle’s Identification Number.
(You can enter between 1 and 17 digits.)
[Edit Policy Number]
Register your insurance policy number.

Registering user information
Enter the information written on the vehicle inspection certificate or insurance certificate.
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Emergency Info].
2

Touch [Setup].

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

[Edit Insurance Phone]
Register your insurance company’s phone
number.
[Edit TOW Service Phone]
Register a towing company’s phone number.
p Touch [Default] to restore the default TOW
service phone number.

Chapter

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

Setting the Vehicle Dynamics
Display
You can change the contents of the meters on
the left and right of the Vehicle Dynamics Display.
Until the sensor’s initial learning is complete,
only the voltage and clock are available.
p The speed displayed is a guideline and may
not correspond to the actual speed.
1 Switch to the Vehicle Dynamics Display.
= For more details about “Changing the map
display mode”, refer to Switching the view
mode on page 38
2 Touch the left or right meter.
Touch panel keys are displayed.
3

Touch the items you want to display.

You can select the following items:
[Voltage]:
Displays the power supply and voltage supplied from the battery to this system.
[Acceleration]:
Acceleration in a forward direction is displayed. The + sign indicates acceleration while
the - sign indicates deceleration.
[Side Acceleration]:
Acceleration in a side direction such as when
turning, is displayed. The + sign indicates a
right turn, while the - sign indicates a left turn.
[Angular Velocity]:
Displays the vehicle’s turning angle over one
second (how far it has turned in a second).
[Slope]:
Displays the vehicle’s vertical movement. +
side represents the rising angle, and - side the
falling angle.
[Direction]:

Displays the direction your vehicle is traveling
in.
[Clock]:
Current time is displayed.
[Adjust Look]:
Touch [Adjust Look] to display a screen for selecting the panel pattern. Touch one of the patterns from among those displayed on screen
to change the panel to the selected pattern.
p If you touch [Peak Hold Reset], the maximum and minimum (green line) values indicated in [Acceleration] and [Side
Acceleration] are reset.
p You cannot change the speedometer at the
center.
p Selecting Demo Mode in the Settings
menu enables you to perform a demonstration with random values.

Chapter

Using Hands-free Phoning
Hands-free Phoning Overview
CAUTION
For your safety, avoid talking on the phone as
much as possible while driving.

Preparing communication devices
To use the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth
wireless technology on the navigation system,
the Bluetooth unit (ND-BT1) (sold separately)
is required.

Precautions for using a cellular phone
featuring Bluetooth technology
By connecting the Bluetooth unit (sold separately), you can use the functions described in
this manual, including hands-free phoning or
phone book transfer. To use these functions,
the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless
technology that you want to connect must
have a supported profile that is the same as
the profile for the Bluetooth unit. For the supported profile, refer to the owner’s manual of
the Bluetooth unit.

p Please read “Notes for hands-free phoning”
for your reference.

= For details, refer to Notes for hands-free
phoning on page 86
p When the power of the navigation system
turns off, the Bluetooth connection is also
disconnected. When the system restarts,
the system automatically attempts to reconnect the Previously connected cellular
phone. Even when the connection is cut for
some reason, the system automatically reconnects the specified cellular phone (except when the connection is cut by the
cellular phone operation).
You can open [Phone Menu] directly by pressing and holding MENU button.

p You can check the signal strength for connection between your cellular phone and
Bluetooth unit (sold separately) with [Connection Status] in [Hardware] Menu.
= For more details about “[Connection
Status]”, refer to Checking the connections
of leads and installation positions on page
90
p You can set the voice volume and ring volume with [Volume] in [Settings] Menu.
= For more details about “Volume”, refer
to Setting the Volume for Guidance and
Phone on page 88
= For more details about “[Volume]”, refer
to Setting the Volume for Guidance and
Phone on page 88
p You can set to mute peripheral sounds during hands-free phoning.
= For more details about “[Mute Set]”,
refer to Switching the muting/attenuation
timing on page 150
While your cellular phone featuring Bluetooth
wireless technology is connected,
is displayed on the map.

Using Hands-free Phoning

If your cellular phone features Bluetooth®
technology, this navigation system can be connected to your cellular phone wirelessly. Using
this hands-free function, you can operate the
navigation system to make or receive phone
calls. You can also transfer the phone book
data stored in your cellular phone to the navigation system. This section describes how to
set up a Bluetooth connection and how to operate a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth
technology on the navigation system.
The following description assumes that the device name of the cellular phone to be connected using Bluetooth wireless technology is
set to [My mobile phone].

Chapter

Using Hands-free Phoning
p If you operate using “CD-SR1” Steering Remote Control (sold separately), the following buttons can be used for operation:
VR ACTIVATION / OFF HOOK button:
Same function as
on the screen.
(Except for [Received Calls] and [Emergency
Info].)
VR CANCEL / ON HOOK button:
Same function as
or
on the screen.
PHONE MENU button:
Open [Phone Menu] directly.

Setting up for hands-free phoning

1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless technology on your cellular phone.
For some cellular phones, no specific action is
necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless technology. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of your cellular phone.
2 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
3 Touch [Phone Settings].
The phone settings screen appears.

Before you can use the hands-free phoning
function, you will need to set up the navigation
system for using that function. This entails registering your cellular phone with the navigation system and establishing a Bluetooth
wireless connection between the navigation
system and your cellular phone.

Registering your cellular phone

5 Touch [Navi].
The system searches for cellular phones with
Bluetooth technology that are waiting for the
connection and displays them in the list.

You need to register your cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology when you
connect it for the first time. A total of five
phones can be registered. Two registration
methods are available:
! Registration from the navigation system
! Registration from the cellular phone
p Once you have registered a phone, you can
select that cellular phone from the list to
connect it without registration.
p If you try to register more than five cellular
phones, the system will ask you to select
one of the registered cellular phones to
overwrite.
= For details, refer to Connecting a registered cellular phone on the next page
p The default device name displayed on the
cellular phone is [PIONEER HDD NAVI].
The default password is [1111].

Operating from the navigation system

Touch [Registration].

6 Wait until your cellular phone appears
in the list.
p If you cannot find the cellular phone you
want to connect, check that the cellular
phone is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless
technology connection.

7 Select the cellular phone you want to
register from the list.
8 Enter the password of the navigation
system to register it using your cellular
phone.
After the registration is completed, the following screen appears.

Chapter

Using Hands-free Phoning

p If registration fails, repeat the procedure
from the beginning. If a connection still
cannot be established, try connecting using
your cellular phone.

Operating from your cellular phone

2 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
3 Touch [Phone Settings].
The phone settings screen appears.
4

Touch [Registration].

p If registration fails repeat the procedure
from the beginning.

Connecting a registered cellular phone
The navigation system automatically connects
the cellular phone selected as a target of connection. However, connect the cellular phone
manually in the following cases:
! Two or more cellular phones are registered,
and you want to manually select the cellular phone to be used.
! You want to reconnect a disconnected cellular phone.
! Connection cannot be established automatically for some reason.
p Unregistered cellular phones cannot be
connected.
1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless technology on your cellular phone.
For some cellular phones, no specific action is
necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless technology. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of your cellular phone.

Using Hands-free Phoning

2 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
5 Touch [Mobile].
The navigation system waits for a Bluetooth
wireless technology connection.
6 Operate your cellular phone to register
the navigation system.
If your cellular phone asks you to enter a password, enter the password of the navigation
system.
After the registration is completed, the following screen appears.

3 Touch [Phone Settings].
The phone settings screen appears.
Phone name currently connected or selected
as a target of connection

Chapter

Using Hands-free Phoning

10
4

Touch [Connection].

5 Touch the name of the cellular phone
that you want to connect.
When a connection is successfully established, a connection complete message appears, and the system returns to the phone
menu screen.
p To cancel the connection to your cellular
phone, touch [Cancel].
p If connection fails, check whether your cellular phone is waiting for a connection.
Then repeat the procedure from step 4.

Editing the device name
You can change the device name to be displayed on your cellular phone. (Default is
[PIONEER HDD NAVI].)

4 Touch any key to enter the password
you want to set and then touch [OK].
= For details, refer to Calculating your destination by using Address Search on page 28
p Four to eight characters can be entered for
a password.

Receiving a phone call
You can use the navigation system to receive a
call hands-free.
The map screen shows the icon while your cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is connected. You can receive a handsfree call only when the cellular phone is connected.
Connecting icon

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
2 Touch [Phone Settings].
The phone settings screen appears.
3

Touch [Device Name].

4 Touch any key to enter the name you
want to set and then touch [OK].
= For details, refer to Calculating your destination by using Address Search on page 28
p Up to 20 characters can be entered for a device name.

Answering an incoming call
The system informs you that it is receiving a
call by displaying a message and producing a
ring sound once.
1

When there is an incoming call, touch
.

Editing the password
You can change the password to be used for
authentication on your cellular phone. (Default is [1111].)
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
2 Touch [Phone Settings].
The phone settings screen appears.
3

Touch [Password].

When there is an incoming call, you can reject
the call by touching
.
p During a call, the
is displayed at the
right-hand side of the screen.

Chapter

Using Hands-free Phoning
2 To end the call, touch
right of the screen.
The call ends.

at the top

p If the received voice is too quiet to hear, you
can adjust the volume of the received voice.
= For more details about “Volume”, refer to
Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone
on page 88
p Depending on the caller ID service, the
phone number of the received call may not
be displayed. [Unknown] appears instead.
p You may hear a noise when you hang up
the phone.

Making a phone call
You can make a phone call in many different
ways.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
2

2 Touch [Dialed Numbers] or [Received
Calls].
The list of either one appears.
3 Touch a name or telephone number
from the list to make a call.
Date and time of the call dialed or received

To cancel the call after the system starts dialing, touch
.
When you make a call to the phone number in
[Received Calls] without “+”, you can add “+”
in front of that number by touching [+]. To delete “+”, touch [+] again in that time.

Touch [Dial].

3 Input the phone number, and then
touch
to make a call.

Touch

to make a call.

4 To end the call, touch
right of the screen.
To cancel the call after the system starts dialing, touch
.
4 To end the call, touch
right of the screen.

at the top

Dialing from the dialed number
history or the received call history
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

Using Hands-free Phoning

Direct dialing

at the top

p Up to 30 entries for each of the dialed number and received call histories are recorded
automatically. When the number of entries
exceeds 30, the entries will be deleted from
the oldest one.
p You can clear the dialed number or received
call history.
= For details, refer to Editing the received
call or dialed number history on page 86

Chapter

Using Hands-free Phoning
Calling a number in the phone book
After finding the list in the Phone Book you
want to call, you can select the number and
make the call.
p Before using this function, you need to
transfer the phone book stored in your cellular phone to the navigation system.
= For details, refer to Transferring the phone
book on the next page
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
2 Touch [Phone Book].
The phone book screen appears.
3 Touch a name from the list to make a
call.
If you touch an alphabet tab, you can jump to
the first page of the contacts whose names
start with that letter.

2 Touch [Dial Favorites].
The “Dial Favorites” screen appears.
3 Touch one of [Favorite 1] to [Favorite 5]
to make a call.
Touch the entry to make a call.
To cancel the call after the system starts dialing, touch
.
4 To end the call, touch
right of the screen.

at the top

Dialing the entry in the Address Book
You can make a call to the entry registered in
the address book.
p You cannot make a call to locations if the
phone number is not registered.
1 Display “Address Book”.
= For more details about “Operation of the
Address Book”, refer to Viewing “Address
Book” on page 60
2 Touch
of the entry you want to call.
The detail screen appears.
3

Touch

to make a call.

Touch the entry in the list to make a call. To
cancel the call after the system starts dialing,
touch
.
4 To end the call, touch
right of the screen.

at the top

Calling a number in “Dial Favorites”
After finding the list in “Dial Favorites” you
want to call, you can select the number and
make the call.
p Before using this function, you need to set
the phone number from the phone book to
“Dial Favorites”.
= For details, refer to Registering a phone
number in “Dial Favorites” on page 84
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

To cancel the call after the system starts dialing, touch
.
4 To end the call, touch
right of the screen.

at the top

Dialing a facility’s phone number
You can make a call to facilities with phone
number data.

Chapter

Using Hands-free Phoning

1 Perform [POI Search] or [Vicinity
Search] and display the detail information.
= For more details about “Operation of [POI
Search]”, refer to Searching for Points of Interest (POI) Statewide on page 51
= For more details about “Operation of [Vicinity Search]”, refer to Finding a POI in the Vicinity on page 53

to make a call.
3 Touch
To cancel the call after the system starts dialing, touch
.

2 Touch
of the entry you want to call.
The detail screen appears.

Transferring the phone book

Touch

to make a call.

4 To end the call, touch
right of the screen.

at the top

Dialing from the map
You can make a call by selecting the icon of a
registered location or a POI icon from the map
screen.
p You cannot make a call to locations or POIs
that have no phone number data.
1 Scroll the map, and place the cursor on
an icon on the map.
2

Touch

at the top

You can transfer the data from the phone book
stored in your cellular phone to the phone
book stored in the navigation system.
By transferring the phone book to the navigation system, you can browse the data in the
transferred phone book on the screen of the
navigation system. You can also select the entries in the phone book to make a call from the
navigation system or edit the data on the navigation system.
p Depending on the cellular phone, “Phone
Book” may be called a name such as “Contacts”, “Business card” or something else.
p The Phone Book can hold a total of 400 entries.
p The Hands-free phoning connection is disconnected to establish the connection for
phone book transfer. When the phone book
is transferred, hands-free phoning is reconnected automatically.
p The phone book of this navigation system
cannot assign the multiple telephone numbers for one person’s name.

Using Hands-free Phoning

To cancel the call after the system starts dialing, touch
.

4 To end the call, touch
right of the screen.

1 Connect your cellular phone featuring
Bluetooth wireless technology.
= For details, refer to Registering your cellular
phone on page 78
2 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
3 Touch [Read Bus. Card].
If there is a phone book already transferred,
the following screen appears.

The detail screen appears.

Chapter

Using Hands-free Phoning
also operate them with Voice Recognition to
make a call.
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
2
[Yes]:
Deletes all phone numbers stored in the
phone book, and then transfers the data.
[No]:
Keeps the current entries and then adds new
data to the phone book. (Duplicate data cannot be consolidated.)

Touch [Dial Favorites].

3 Touch [Set] on any of [Favorite 1] — [Favorite 5].

p If you want to keep the existing phone book,
select [No].

4 Check that the following screen is displayed, and operate your cellular phone to
transfer the phone book entries.

4 Touch the entry you want to register.
The Phone Book Record screen appears.
5 Touch [OK].
The selected entry is registered in the corresponding “Dial Favorites”.

Editing the entry in “Phone Book”
The phone book entries in your cellular phone
are transferred to the navigation system. To
cancel the transfer, touch [Cancel].
p Only the names and telephone numbers
can be transferred.
p The transferred data can be edited on the
navigation system.
= For details, refer to Editing the entry in
“Phone Book” on this page

You can edit the imported phone book data or
add new data. You can edit [Name], [Pronunciation], [Phone #], or [Picture]. You can also
delete unnecessary data.
p The data cannot be transferred back to the
cellular phone.

Editing data or adding new data
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
2

Registering a phone number in
“Dial Favorites”
You can register up to five entries into “Dial Favorites” from the phone book. Registering the
phone numbers that you frequently use in
“Dial Favorites” will ease the dialing operation.
The entries registered in “Dial Favorites” can
be operated from the shortcut menu. You can

Touch [Phone Book].

or [Add].
3 Touch
The edit screen appears.
p To add data by entering it as desired, touch
[Add].

Chapter

Using Hands-free Phoning
4

Select the entry you want to edit.

1
2
3

10
ever, they are not reflected to the data
registered in [Dial Favorites].
4 Picture
Sets the image to be displayed when a call
is received.
= For details, refer to Customizing the incoming call picture for a phone book entry
on this page

Customizing the incoming call
picture for a phone book entry
Be sure to read “Limitations for importing pictures” before creating a CD-R (-RW).
= For details, refer to Limitations for importing
pictures on page 94

You can customize a picture for the phone
book record. Some pictures are already stored
in the hard disk drive, and you can also import
JPEG format pictures, such as a picture from
your digital camera, by using a CD-R (-RW).
You can use pictures by burning them onto a
CD-R (-RW) with your PC and insert that into
the navigation system.
Here, a method for changing the picture is described with an example of loading a picture
stored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the navigation
system.

Using Hands-free Phoning

1 Name
Enter the name to be displayed in the
phone book.
For more details about operations, please
read the following page.
= For details, refer to Changing a name on
page 61
p Up to 40 characters can be input for the
name.
2 Pronunciation
You can enter the desired pronunciation independently from the name. The registered
pronunciation is used for voice recognition.
For more details about operations, please
read the following page.
= For details, refer to Changing a pronunciation on page 62
p Up to 40 characters can be input for the
pronunciation.
p If nothing is entered in a text box, you
cannot use that item as a voice command.
p Depending on which language is being
switched to, you may not be able to use
the registered pronunciation without
modification.
= For details, refer to Available Voice
Commands on page 159
3 Phone #
Enter the phone number to be displayed in
the phone book. Touch [OK] to complete
the input and return to the previous screen.
p Up to 32 characters can be input for the
phone number.
p The edited names and phone numbers
are reflected to the dialed number history and the received call history. How-

1 Check that no disc is inserted, and insert your CD-R (-RW) to the disc loading
slot.
2 Touch [Picture], and then touch [Import
from Disc].
The list of the pictures stored in the CD-R (RW) is displayed.
On this screen, you can select the following
item:
[Back to Original]:
The picture originally used when the system
was purchased is selected.
p Touching an option other than [Import
from Disc] allows you to select a background image stored on the hard disk drive.

Chapter

Using Hands-free Phoning

10
3

Touch a picture you want to set.

4 Touch [Yes].
On this screen, you can select the following
items:
[No]:
Select when you want to change to another
picture.
Return to Step 3.

Deleting data
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
2

Editing data
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
2 Touch [Dialed Numbers] or [Received
Calls].
.
3 Touch
The edit screen appears. Steps after this are
the same as for editing the phone book.
= For details, refer to Editing the entry in
“Phone Book” on page 84

p The phone number cannot be edited if it is
already registered in the phone book.

Touch [Phone Book].

3 Touch [Delete].
The “Delete from Phone Book” screen appears.
4 Touch the entry you want to delete.
A red check mark appears next to the selected
entry. To cancel the selection, touch the entry
again.

Deleting data
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
2 Touch [Dialed Numbers] or [Received
Calls].
3

Touch [Delete].

4 Touch [Yes].
All history data is deleted, and the current location screen appears.
p To cancel the deletion, touch [No].

Notes for hands-free phoning
5

Touch [Delete].

6 Touch [Yes].
The data is deleted, and the current location
screen appears.
p To cancel the deletion, touch [No].

Editing the received call or
dialed number history
You can edit the data in the dialed number history or the received call history. You can edit
them and the edited entries are registered in
the phone book. You can also delete the history data.

General notes
! Connection to all cellular phones featuring
Bluetooth wireless technology is not guaranteed.
! The line-of-sight distance between this navigation system and your cellular phone
must be 10 meters or less when sending
and receiving voice and data via Bluetooth
technology. However, the transmission distance may become shorter than the estimated distance, depending on the
environment in use.

Chapter

Using Hands-free Phoning
! You cannot delete a registered cellular
phone. If you need to delete it, refer to “Returning the Navigation System to the Default or Factory Settings on page 187” clear
[Phone Settings] , and delete it together
with other functions.
! With some cellular phones, the speakers of
the system may not produce a ring sound.
! If private mode is selected on the cellular
phone, hands-free phoning may not be performed.
About registration and connection
! Cellular phone operations varies depending
on the type of your cellular phone. Refer to
the instruction manual that came with your
cellular phone for detailed instructions.

About received call history and dialed
number history
! Calls made or editing performed only on
your cellular phone will not be reflected to
the dialed number history or phone book in
the navigation system.
! You cannot make a call to the entry of an
unknown user (no phone number) in the received call history.
! If calls are made by operating your cellular
phone, no history data will be recorded in
the navigation system.
About phone book transfer
! With some cellular phones, it may not be
possible to transfer all items in the phone
book at one time. In this case, transfer
items one at a time from your cellular
phone.
! Depending on the cellular phone that is
connected to this navigation system via
Bluetooth technology, this navigation system cannot display the phone book correctly. (Some characters may be garbled or
first name and last name is put in reverse
order.)
! If the phone book in the cellular phone contains image data, the phone book may not
be transferred correctly. (Image data cannot be transferred from the cellular phone.)
! Depending on the cellular phone, phone
book transfer may not be available.

Using Hands-free Phoning

About making and receiving calls
! You may hear a noise in the following situations:
— When you answer the phone by using
the button on the phone.
— When the person on the other end of
line hangs up the phone.
! If the person on the other end of the phone
call cannot hear the conversation due to an
echo, decrease the volume level for handsfree phoning. This may reduce the effects
of the echo.
! With some cellular phones, even if you
press accept button on the cellular phone
when a call arrives, hands-free phoning
may not be performed.
! The registered name appears if the phone
number of the received call is already registered in the phone book. When one phone
number is registered under different
names, the name that comes first alphabetically is displayed.
! If the phone number of the received call is
not registered in the phone book, the
phone number of the received call appears.

Chapter

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

This setting controls the beep tone volume for
navigation.
[Phone Ringtone]
This setting controls the incoming ring tone
volume.
[Phone Voice]
This setting controls the incoming voice volume.
p Phone Ringtone and Phone Voice adjustments are related to the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology. No
adjustment is needed when the cellular
phone featuring Bluetooth technology is
not connected.
p Volume of the audio source is adjusted by
VOL (a/b) button of the navigation system.

Entering the Settings Menu
1 Press MENU button to display the navigation menu.
2 Touch [Settings] to display the Settings
menu.
3 Change the setting.
= For more details about “Adjusting each
item”, refer to Chapter 11

Setting the Volume for
Guidance and Phone
The sound volume for the navigation can be
set. You can separately set the volume of the
route guidance and the beep sound.
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Volume].
2 Touch [+] or [-] to set their volume.
On this screen, you can operate the following
items.

To finish the setting, touch [OK].

Customizing the Regional
Settings
Changing the language for
navigation guidance and menu
You can select the language to be used for the
navigation function. (Once you change the
language, the system restarts.)
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Regional Settings].
2

Touch [Language].

3 Touch the language that you want to
use.
Once you change the language, the system restarts.

[Guidance]
This setting controls the guidance volume of
navigation.
When set to
, guidance is output. When set
to
, no guidance is output.
[Beep]

p Touching [Back] returns you to the previous
display.

Chapter

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

p If you select [English with TTS], the name
of the next street you will pass is announced. If you select [English without
TTS], the name of the next street you will
pass is not announced.

Setting the time difference
Adjusts the systems clock. Set the time difference (+, -) from the time originally set in your
navigation system.

To finish the setting, touch [OK].

Customizing the keyboard layout

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Regional Settings].

You can select the type of keyboard to be used
for inputting characters.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Regional Settings].

Touch [Time].

3 To set the time difference, touch [+] or
[-].
Time difference

[QWERTZ]:
The time difference between the time originally set in the navigation system (Pacific Standard Time) and the current location of your
vehicle is shown. If necessary, adjust the time
difference. Touching [+] or [-] changes the
time difference display in one-hour increments.
The time difference can be set from -4 to +9
hours.
4 If necessary, set to summer time.
Daylight Saving Time (DST) is off by default.
Touch [Summer Time] to change the time if
you are in the daylight saving period. This
turns the display below summer time [On].

[ABC]:

[AZERTY]:

Changing the unit between km
and miles
This setting controls the unit of distance and
speed displayed on your navigation system.

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

2 Touch [Keyboard] to select the layout
that you want to use.
Each time you touch the key changes that setting.
[QWERTY] (default):

Chapter

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Regional Settings].

Checking the connections of
leads and installation positions

2 Touch [km / mile] to change the setting.
Each time you touch the key changes that setting.
[mile] (default):
Show distance in miles.
[Mile&Yard]:
Show distance in miles and yards.
[km]:
Show distance in kilometers.

Check that leads are properly connected between the navigation system and the vehicle.
Please also check whether they are connected
in the correct positions.

Changing the virtual speed of
the vehicle
When calculating the expected time of arrival
and the number of hours to the destination,
set the average speed for the freeway or ordinary roads using [+] and [-].
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Regional Settings].
2

Touch [Average Speed].

Touch [+] or [-] to set the speed.

p The estimated time of arrival is not necessarily estimated based on this speed value.

Checking the Setting
Related with Hardware
The hardware status, including the driving status of a vehicle, positioning status by satellite,
learning status of the 3D sensor, and cable
connection status, can be checked.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Hardware].
2 Touch [Connection Status].
The “Connection Status” screen appears.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1 Speed Pulse
The Speed Pulse value detected by the navigation system is shown. [0] is shown while
the vehicle is stationary.
2 GPS Antenna
Indicates the connection status of the GPS
antenna, the reception sensitivity, and from
how many satellites the signal is received. If
the signal is received correctly, [OK] is displayed. If reception is poor, [NOK] appears.
In such case, please change the installation
position of the GPS antenna.
3 Phone Connection Status
Indicates the connection status of the Bluetooth unit (sold separately) and the signal
strength between the Bluetooth unit and
the cellular phone. If the Bluetooth unit is
connected correctly, [OK] is displayed.
[NOK] appears when the Bluetooth unit is
not connected or incorrectly connected.
4 Installation Position

Chapter

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

Checking sensor learning
status and driving status
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Hardware].
2 Touch [3D Calibration Status].
The 3D Calibration Status screen appears.

5
6

1
2
3

1 Distance
Driving distance is indicated.
2 Speed Pulse
Total number of speed pulses is indicated.
3 Learning Status
Current driving mode is indicated.
4 Degree of learning
Sensor learning situations for distance
(Distance), right turn (Right Turn), left turn
(Left Turn) and 3D detection (3D) are indicated by the length of bars.
p When tires have been changed or
chains fitted, turning on the Speed
Pulse allows the system to detect the
fact that the tire diameter has changed,
and automatically replaces the value for
calculating distance.
p If ND-PG1 is connected, the distance
calculation value cannot be replaced
automatically.
5 Speed
The speed detected by the navigation system is indicated. (This indication may be
different from the actual speed of your vehicle, so please do not use this instead of the
speedometer.)
6 Acceleration or deceleration/Rotational
speed
Acceleration or deceleration velocity of your
vehicle is indicated. Also, rotational speed
when your vehicle turns to left or right is
shown.
7 Inclination
Degree of slope of the street is indicated.

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

The installation position of the navigation
system is shown. That indicates whether
the installation position of the navigation
system is correct or not. If installed correctly, [OK] appears. When the navigation
system is installed at an extreme angle exceeding the limitation of the installing
angle, [Incorrect angle] will be displayed.
When the angle of the navigation system
has been changed, [Excessive vibration]
will be displayed.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied, [On] is
displayed. When the parking brake is released, [Off] is displayed.
Power Voltage
The power voltage (reference value) provided from the vehicle battery to the navigation system is shown. If the voltage goes
out of the range from 11 V to 15 V, check
that power cable connection is correct.
Illumination
When the headlights or small lamps of a vehicle are on, [On] is displayed. When the
small lamps of a vehicle are off, [Off] is displayed. (If the orange/white lead is not connected, [Off] appears.)
Back Signal
When the gear lever is shifted to “R”, the
signal switches to [High] or [Low]. (One of
these is displayed depending on the vehicle.)

Chapter

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

To clear values...
If you want to delete the learned results stored
in [Distance], [Speed Pulse] or [Learning Status], touch the relevant result, then touch
[Yes].
p If you select [Learning Status], you can select [Reset All] or [Reset Distance Study].
To clear all learning statuses, touch [Reset
All]. To clear only the Distance study, touch
[Reset Distance Study].
p Touch [Reset All] for the following cases:
— After changing the installation position
of the navigation system
— After changing the installation angle of
the navigation system
— After moving the navigation system to
another vehicle
p When the distance accuracy is low, touch
[Reset Distance Study].
p Touching [Reset All] returns the installation angle setting also to the default or factory setting. Reconfigure the setting.
= For details, refer to Correcting the installation angle on this page

p The navigation system can automatically
use its sensor memory based on the outer
dimensions of the tires.

3 Check the direction the LCD panel
faces, and touch the corresponding item.

[Left]:
Select this when the angle is 5° or more to the
left from the center.
[Center] (default):
Select this when the angle is less than 5° to
the left and right from the center.
[Right]:
Select this when the angle is 5° or more to the
right from the center.
p If [Learning Status] in [3D Calibration
Status] is [Simple Hybrid], the installation
angle can be corrected.

Checking the device and
version information
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Hardware].
2

Touch [Service Info Screen].

3 Check the device and version information.

Correcting the installation angle
You can correct the installation angle of the
navigation system. Correcting the installation
angle improves the accuracy of sensor learning, even if the unit is not facing center. Select
the orientation of the LCD panel from the left,
center, and right.
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Hardware].
2

Touch [Installation Angle Setup].

Checking the hard disk
information
You can check the volume of the hard disk,
current used space and remaining space.
p The hard disk space (%) means free space
of the music library. In some cases, even
when about 10 % of free space is left, no
more music tracks may be recorded due to
system restriction.
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Hardware].

Chapter

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions
2

Touch [Hard Disk Info].
Hard disk space (%)

= For more details about “Information on
searching for locations to register”, refer to
Chapter 6
p If you select [Map Search], move the scroll
cursor to the place you want to set and
touch [OK].

Registering the Home Location
and Favorite Location
You can register one home location and one
favorite location. You can change the registered information later. You might find it useful
to register your workplace or a relative’s home
as your favorite location.

2 Touch [Go to].
When registering your home location, touch
[Home].

3 Search for a location to register.
You can select a method of location search.

= For more details about “Address Search”,
refer to Calculating your destination by using
Address Search on page 28

5 Touch [OK].
Completes the registration.

Changing the Background
Picture
Be sure to read “Limitations for importing pictures” before creating a CD-R (-RW) and “Precautions when changing the Splash Screen”.
= For details, refer to Limitations for importing
pictures on the next page
= For details, refer to Precautions when changing the Splash Screen on page 95

In the menu operation screen, you can customize a picture for the background. Some pictures are already stored in the hard disk drive,
and you can also import JPEG format pictures,
such as a picture from your digital camera, by
using a CD-R(-RW). You can use pictures as
background pictures by burning them onto a
CD-R (-RW) with your PC and inserting it into
the navigation system.
The following types of background pictures
can be changed:
! Splash Screen: The screen that appears
when the Navigation system starts up.
! Navigation Background: Background picture of the navigation menu screen.
! AV Background: Background picture during the operation of audio source screen.

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Defined Locations].

Chapter

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

Here, a method for changing the background
picture is described with an example of loading a picture stored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the
navigation system as the background picture.

Touch a picture you want to set.

Touch [OK].

1 Check that no disc is inserted, and insert your CD-R (-RW) to the disc loading
slot.
2 Touch [Settings] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Background Picture Setting].
The picture selected for each screen is indicated on the right side of [Splash Screen],
[Navigation Background] and [AV Background] items.
3 Touch [Splash Screen], [Navigation
Background] or [AV Background].

Touch [Import from Disc].

If you touch [OK], the background image
starts changing. After a short while, the confirmation screen appears.
p When the image has a large file size, it
takes more time to change the Background
Picture. Do not perform other operations
until the message “Updating. Please do
not turn off the power.” disappears.
p If you want to change to another picture,
touch [Back] to return to Step 4.
p When the picture starts to change, do not
turn off the vehicle engine until the message appears to indicate that the picture
has finished changing.

Limitations for importing pictures

When you burn a CD-R (-RW), make sure the
total data size of the CD-R (-RW) is greater
than 100 MB by storing dummy data or other
filler information. Otherwise, the disc may not
be recognized by the built-in DVD drive.

The list of the pictures stored in the CD-R (RW) is displayed.
On this screen, you can select the following
item:
[Back to Original], [Back to PIONEER Original]:
The picture originally used when the system
was purchased is selected.
p Touching an option other than [Import
from Disc] allows you to select a background image stored on the hard disk drive.

p You cannot use a CD-R (-RW) containing
MP3 files or Audio data (CD-DA part) for
importing pictures.
p When storing pictures on a CD-R (-RW),
create a folder named “Pictures” in the CDR (-RW), and store the picture files in this
folder. (Up to 200 picture files can be used
in total, including pictures that are already
stored in the hard disk drive and pictures in
the CD-R (-RW).)

Chapter

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

Precautions when changing the
Splash Screen
The following is the default Splash Screen for
the Navigation System.
[PIONEER Original]

If an image other than the one shown above is
previously set (such as an image from the
dealer or other source) and you change the
Splash Screen once, you must use the CD-R (RW) where the image is recorded to restore
the previous Splash Screen.

Using the Demonstration
Guidance
This is a demonstration function for shops.
After a route is set, the simulation of the route
guidance to a destination is automatically displayed. Normally, set this to [Off].
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation
menu.
2 Touch [Demo Mode] to change the setting.
Each time you touch the key changes that setting.
[On]:
Repeat demo drive.
[Off] (default):
Demo Mode is set off.

Correcting the Current
Location
Touch the screen to adjust the current position
and direction of the vehicle displayed on the
map.
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Modify Current Location].
2 Scroll to the position where you want
to set, then touch [OK].

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

p When you burn a CD-R (-RW), limit the
number of folder hierarchy levels to eight.
p You can only use a CD-R (-RW) finalized
with single-session for importing pictures.
p You can only use a CD-R (-RW) finalized
with “Mode1” for importing pictures.
p Only JPEG format (“.jpg” or “.JPG”) pictures
can be used. Progressive format JPEG pictures cannot be used.
p Using only the standard Latin characters
(alphabets of both cases: A-Z, a-z) and
numbers (0-9) is recommended for the file
name. If you want to use letters with diacritical marks (such as ä or è) for file name, finalize the CD-R(-RW) with Joliet (Unicode)
format.
p Pictures up to a maximum of 2 592 x 1 944
pixels can be used. We cannot guarantee
proper operation for a picture bigger than
this size.
p After changing a set image that was imported from a CD-R (-RW), you must use
the CD-R (-RW) where the image is recorded to restore the previous Splash
Screen.

3 Touch the arrow key on the screen to
set the direction, then touch [OK].

Chapter

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

Restoring the Default Setting
Resets various settings registered to the navigation system and restores to the default or
factory settings.
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Restore Factory Settings].
2

Touch [Yes] to clear the current setting.
p Touch [No] to cancel clear the current setting.
= For details, refer to Returning the Navigation System to the Default or Factory Settings on page 187

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
You can play or use the following sources with
the navigation system.
! DVD-Video
! CD
! MP3 disc
! Radio (FM)
! Radio (AM)
! Music Library
= For more details about “About the music library”, refer to Chapter 13
This chapter describes how to use the AV
source and the basic operation of the AV
source.

Basic Operation
Switching the Audio operation
screen

Selecting a source
Select a source on “AV Source Menu”
1 Press AV button to switch Audio operation screen.
2

Touch the source icon.
Source icon

Touch the desired source.

% Press AV button to switch Audio operation screen.

= For details, refer to Selecting the video for
“Rear display” on page 153

Select a source by using AV button
You can press AV button to switch the source.
1 Press AV button to switch Audio operation screen.

1 Touch panel keys
p Touch [Hide] to hide the touch panel
keys. If you touch the screen, the touch
panel keys are displayed again.

2 Press AV button to select the desired
source.
Press AV button repeatedly to switch between
the following sources:

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

p Touch [OFF] to turn the source off.
p Touch [REAR SCREEN] to select the source
for “Rear display”.

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
[CD/ROM (MP3)/DVD] (built-in DVD drive) —
[LIBRARY] (Music library) — [FM] (FM tuner)
— [AM] (AM tuner) — [XM] (XM tuner) —
[SIRIUS] (SIRIUS tuner) — [iPod] (iPod) —
[M-CD] (multi-CD) — [TV] (television) —
[AV INPUT] (video input) — [AUX] (auxiliary
equipment) — [EXT 1] (external unit 1) —
[EXT 2] (external unit 2)
p In the following cases, the sound source
cannot to be used:
— When a unit corresponding to each
source is not connected to the navigation system.
— When no disc is set in the navigation
system.
— When no magazine is set in the multiCD player.
— When [AUX Input] is set to [Off].
= For details, refer to Switching the auxiliary setting on page 150
— When [AV Input] is not set to [Video].
= For details, refer to Setting the video
input on page 150
p The term “external unit” refers to future
Pioneer devices that are not currently
planned for, or devices that allow control of
basic functions although they are not fully
controlled by the navigation system. Two external units can be controlled by this navigation system. When two external units are
connected, the navigation system allocates
them to external unit 1 or external unit 2.
p When [Auto ANT] mode is set to[Radio],
the vehicle’s antenna can be stowed or
turned off by following the instructions
below.
— Change the source from radio (AM or
FM) to another source.
— Turn the source off.
— Turn off the ignition switch (ACC OFF).
If [Auto ANT] mode is set to [Power], the
vehicle’s antenna can be stowed or turned
off only when the ACC is set to “OFF”.
= For more details about “[Auto ANT]”,
refer to Switching the auto antenna setting
on page 151

About Steering Remote Control
p When using “CD-SR1” Steering Remote
Control (sold separately), the following buttons can be used for operation:
PHONE MENU button
Switches to Phone menu when Bluetooth unit
(sold separately) is connected.
VR ACTIVATION / OFF HOOK button
Press to accept the call when there is an incoming call.
In other situations, press to start the voice operation.
VR CANCEL / ON HOOK button
Press to reject a call when there is an incoming call.
Press to hang up the phone during talking on
the phone.
In voice operation, return to the previous
screen.
a b button:
Same function as P.LIST (a/b) button.
c d button:
Same function as TRK (c/d) button.
+, – button:
Same function as VOL (b/a) button.
BAND button:
Same function as [Band] touch panel key.
SOURCE button:
Same function as AV button.

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

Viewing the audio operation screen and displaying the Audio
Settings menu
Normal screen (e.g. CD)
1

Touch

1 Information plate
Displays the information (e.g. track title) about
the source being played.
2 Touch panel keys
Touch to operate the source being played.
3 Detailed information
Displays the detailed information about the
source being played.
4 AV Settings key
Displays the AV Settings menu.
5 Hide key
Touch [Hide] to hide the touch panel keys and
detailed information. If you touch the screen,
they are displayed again.
6 Audio Settings tab
Switches the setting items to those for
Audio Settings.
7 System Settings tab
Switches the setting items to those for
System Settings.
8 Setting Items
= For details, refer to Customizing the Audio
Setting related with Audio Visual on page
142

Operating a Music CD
You can play a normal music CD using the
built-in DVD drive of the navigation unit. This
section describes that operations.

Selecting [CD] as the source
% Press OPEN CLOSE button and insert a
disc you want to play to disc loading slot.
The source changes and then playback will
start.
p If the disc is already set, touch the source
icon and then touch [CD].
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 97
p When being read in, Checking disc is displayed.

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
About auto hard disk recording
The Navigation system can record the tracks
from a music CD into the hard disk drive. In
default setting, the system starts recording
automatically when an unrecorded music CD
is inserted.
If you want to cancel the recording, touch
[Stop].

Stop

= For more details about “Setting the hard
disk recording mode”, refer to Setting the CD
recording mode on page 152
= For details, refer to Music Library Recording
on page 110
= For details, refer to Music Library Play on
page 112
p Also see at “Handling and Care of the Disc”
in the hardware manual and “Detail Information for Playable Media on page 199” for
more cautions about handling each type of
media.

Screen configuration
1 4 2

7
6

1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Disc title indicator
Shows the title of the disc currently playing.
(when available.)
3 Playback method indicator

100

Shows which playback method has been selected.
Track number indicator
Shows the number of the track currently playing.
Track title indicator
Shows the title of the track currently playing.
(when available.)
Artist name indicator
Shows the name of the artist currently playing. (when available.)
Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current
track.
Track list
Shows tracks of the CD currently playing.

Title display
Music recognition technology and related
data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is
the industry standard in music recognition
technology and related content delivery. For
more information visit www.gracenote.com.
p Title information will be displayed when the
information is found in the Gracenote® Database on the built-in hard disk drive. If you
insert a CD-TEXT disc*, the system prioritizes the title information encoded in CDTEXT disc.
*: Some discs have text information encoded on the disc during manufacture.
These discs may contain such information
as the CD title, track title, and artist’s
name. These discs are called CD-TEXT
discs.
p When multiple options for the title information are found or no title information exists,
[-] is displayed.
p The title information displayed on the CD
playback screen and the recording screen
is synchronized with the one edited in the
music library. Once you edit the title information in the music library, the title displayed on each screen will change
accordingly.
= For details, refer to Editing a playlist or
tracks on page 117
p Up to 32 characters can be entered. But
the navigation system incorporates proportional font. Therefore, the number of the
characters that you can display varies according to the type of character.

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
p If the built-in DVD drive does not operate
properly, an error message may be displayed.
= For details, refer to Messages for Audio
Functions on page 184

Touch panel key operation
Touch panel keys

p If you perform track search or fast forward or rewind, repeat play is automatically canceled.
6 Play tracks in a random order
turns the random play on or
Touching
off.
7 Scan tracks of a CD
turns the scan play on or off.
Touching
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of
each track on the CD. When you find the deto turn scan play off.
sired track touch

p After scanning of a CD is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin
again.

2
4

Operating the CD-ROM
(MP3 disc)
1

You can play an MP3 disc using the built-in
DVD drive of the navigation unit. This section
describes those operations.

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

1 Select a desired track from the list
Touch a desired track to play.
2 Playback and Pause
Touching f switches between “playback”
and “pause”.
3 Touch: Skip the track forward or backward
Touching p skips to the start of the next
track.
Touching o once skips to the start of the
current track. Touching again will skip to the
previous track.
Touch and hold: Fast rewind or forward
Keep touching o or p to perform fast rewind or forward.

p You can also perform these operations
by using TRK (c/d) button.
p Fast rewind is canceled when it reaches
the beginning of the first track on the
disc.

4 Stop playback
When you stop playback by touching g, that
track number on the disc is memorized, enabling playback from that track when you play
the disc again.

p To play the disc again, touch f.

5 Repeat the current track
turns the repeat play on
Each touch of
or off.
“Track Repeat” is displayed on the playback
method indicator during track repeat.

101

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
Selecting [ROM] as the source
% Press OPEN CLOSE button and insert
the disc that you want to play into disc
loading slot.
The source changes and then playback will
start.
p If the disc is already set, touch the source
icon and then touch [ROM].

= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 97
p While loading, Checking disc is displayed.
p Also see “Handling and Care of the Disc” in
the hardware manual and “Detail Information
for Playable Media on page 199” in this manual
for more cautions about handling each
media.

Shows the artist name currently playing only
when an ID3 tag has been encoded on the
MP3 file.
6 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current
track.
7 Folder and track list
Shows contents of the folder currently playing
or temporarily displayed.
8 Bit rate
Shows the bit rate of the file currently playing.

Touch panel key operation
Touch panel keys

32 6

3
4
a

Screen configuration
1

3 4 58

2
6

1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Playback method indicator
Shows which playback method has been selected.
3 Folder indicator
Shows the folder number and folder name
currently playing. When an ID3 tag has been
encoded on the file, the disc title will be
shown instead of the folder name.
4 Track indicator
Shows the track number and file name of the
track currently playing. When an ID3 tag has
been encoded on the file, the track title will be
shown instead of the file name.
5 Artist name indicator

102

7 8

1 Select tracks from the list or viewing contents of the folders
The list lets you see the list of track titles or
folder names on a disc. If you touch a folder
on the list, you can view its contents. If you
touch a track on the list, you can play the selected track.

p Touching or switches to the next or
previous page in the list.
p If the selected folder does not contain
any track that can be played, the track
list is not displayed.
2 Playback and Pause
Touching f switches between “playback”
and “pause”.
3 Touch: Skip forward or backward
Touching p skips to the start of the next
track. Touching o once skips to the start of
the current track. Touching again will skip to
the previous track.
Touch and hold: Fast rewind or forward

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
Keep touching o or p to perform fast rewind or forward.

p You can also perform these operations
by using TRK (c/d) button.
p Fast rewind is canceled when it reaches
the beginning of the first track on the
disc.
p In the case of MP3, there is no sound on
fast rewind or forward.
4 Stop playback
When you stop playback by touching g, that
track number on the disc is memorized, enabling playback from that track when you play
the disc again.

p To play the disc again, touch f.
5 Select upper folder
Touch
to move to the upper folder and
play back the first track on that folder. If the
folder contain no MP3 files, the contents of
that folder are shown.

p If the current folder is the ROOT folder,
can not be used.

!
!
!
!
!
!
!
p

Disc Title (disc title)*
Track Title (track title)*
Folder Title (folder name)
File Name (file name)
Artist Name (artist name)*
Genre (genre)*
Release Year (release year)*
The information marked with an asterisk
(*) is displayed only when an ID3 tag
has been encoded on MP3 files on the
disc. If specific information of the ID3
tag has not been encoded on MP3 files

on disc, the corresponding item may be
blank.
8 Repeat play
Each touch of
follows:

changes the settings as

! Track Repeat — Repeat just the current
track
! Folder Repeat — Repeat the folder currently playing
p If you select another track or perform
fast forward/rewind during
Track Repeat, the repeat play is canceled.
p If you select another folder or perform
fast forward/rewind during
Folder Repeat, the repeat play is canceled. (You can perform track search
within that folder with Folder repeat.)
p When Folder Repeat is selected, it is
not possible to play back a subfolder of
that folder.
9 Play tracks in random order
Touching
switches between playing
tracks randomly or sequentially within a selected repeat range.
a Scan folders and tracks
Touching
turns the scan play on or off.
Scan play will be performed for the selected
repeat range.

p In default, the beginning of the first
track of each folder will be played for
about 10 seconds. When
“Folder Repeat” is selected for repeat
play, the beginning of each track in the
selected folder will play for about 10 seconds. When you find the desired track,
touch
to turn scan play off.
p After track or folder scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will
begin again.

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

6 Switch mode between MP3 and music CD
(CD-DA)
When playing discs with MP3 files and audio
data (CD-DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXEDMODE CDs, both types can be played only by
switching mode between MP3 and CD-DA.
Touching [Media] switches between CD-DA
part and MP3 part.
7 Display text information on MP3 disc
Text information recorded on an MP3 disc can
be displayed.
The next piece of information is displayed.

103

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
Notes on playing MP3 disc
p When playing discs with MP3 files and
audio data (CD-DA) such as CD-EXTRA and
MIXED-MODE CDs, both types can be
played only by switching mode between
MP3 and CD-DA. When playing back the
CD-DA part, the operation is the same as
for normal music CDs. Likewise, when playing back the MP3 part, the operation is the
same as for MP3. Refer to the instructions
for each type of media.
p If you have switched between playback of
MP3 files and audio data (CD-DA), playback starts at the first track on the disc.
p Playback is carried out in order of file number. Folders are skipped if they contain no
MP3 files. (For example, if folder 01 (ROOT)
contains no MP3 files, playback commences with folder 02.)
p When playing back files recorded as VBR
(variable bit rate) files, the play time will not
be correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse operations are used.
p If the built-in DVD drive does not operate
properly, an error message may be displayed.
= For details, refer to Messages for Audio
Functions on page 184

Operating the DVD
CAUTION
For safety reasons, video images cannot be
viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view
video images, you must stop in a safe place and
put on the parking brake before setting your route
(Refer to To ensure safe driving on page 22).

You can play a DVD-Video using the built-in
DVD drive of the navigation system. This section describes operations for DVD-Video.

Selecting [DVD] as the source
% Press OPEN CLOSE button and insert a
disc you want to play to disc loading slot.
The source changes and then playback will
start.

104

p If the disc is already set, touch the source
icon and then touch [DVD].
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 97
p Also see “Handling and Care of the Disc” in
the hardware manual and “Detail Information
for Playable Media on page 199” in this manual
for more cautions about handling DVD-Video.

Screen configuration
1

1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Sound output indicator
Shows which sound output setting has been
selected.
3 Repeat range indicator
Shows which repeat range has been selected.
4 Title number indicator
Shows the title number currently playing.
5 Subtitle language indicator
Shows what subtitle language has been selected.
6 Chapter number indicator
Shows the chapter currently playing.
7 Audio language indicator
Shows what audio language has been selected.
8 Viewing angle indicator
Shows what viewing angle has been selected.
9 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current
chapter.

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
Touch panel key operation
Playback screen (page1)
2

changes into
or
. When this happens, fast rewind/ fast forward continues even
if you release o or p. To resume playback
at a desired point, touch f, o or p.

p You can also perform these operations
by using TRK (c/d) button.

2
1
3
7

Playback screen (page2)

9
b
c
e

Menu screen

f
g

p With some discs, the icon 9 may be displayed, meaning that the operation is not
valid.
1 Playback and Pause
Touching f switches between “playback”
and “pause”.
2 Touch: Skip forward or backward
Touching p skips to the start of the next
chapter. Touching o once skips to the start
of the current chapter. Touching again will
skip to the previous chapter.
Touch and hold: Fast rewind or forward
Keep touching o or p to perform fast rewind or forward. If you keep touching o or
p for five seconds, the icon m or n

p With some discs, images may be unclear during frame-by-frame playback or
slow motion playback.
p There is no sound during slow motion
playback.
p Reverse slow motion playback is not
possible.

7 Switch next page of touch panel keys
8 Repeat play
Each touch of
the changes the settings
as follows:

! Chapter Repeat — Repeat just the current chapter
! Title Repeat — Repeat just the current
title
p If you perform chapter (title) search, fast
forward/rewind, or slow motion playback, the repeat play range changes to
off.
9 Change the subtitle language (Multi-subtitle)
Each time you touch [Subtitle], the DVD
switches between subtitle language.
a Change the viewing angle (Multi-angle)
Each time you touch [Angle], the DVD
switches between viewing angles.

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

Playback screen (page2)

3 Stop playback
4 Display the DVD menu
You can display the menu by touching [Menu]
or [Top Menu] while a disc is playing. Touching either of these keys again lets you start
playback from the location selected from the
menu. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc.
5 Display the DVD menu keypad
6 Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion
playback)
Touch and hold to start slow-motion playback.
Touching this during playback pauses the
image and each touch forwards a frame.
To return to normal playback, touch f.

105

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
p During playback of a scene shot from
is
multiple angles, the angle icon
displayed. Turn the angle icon display
on or off using “DVD-V Setup” menu.
= For details, refer to Setting angle icon display on page 147
b Change audio language and audio systems (Multi-audio)
Each time you touch [Audio], the DVD
switches between audio language and audio
system.

p Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. If navigation system’s optical digital outputs are not connected, DTS
audio can not be output, so select an
audio setting other than DTS.
p Display indications such as Dolby D and
5.1ch indicate the audio system recorded on the DVD. Depending on the
setting, playback may not be with the
same audio system as that indicated.
c Specify the chapter you want to play back
or the time to start playback by entering a
number
= For details, refer to Searching for a desired
scene, starting playback from a specified time
on this page
d Perform the operation (such as resuming)
stored in the disc
When using a DVD that has a point recorded
that indicates where to return to, the DVD returns to the specified point and begins play
back from that point.
e Switch to the previous page of touch
panel keys
f Select the DVD menu item
g Decide the item
When you select a certain video item, playback starts from the selected item. When you
select an item with a submenu, the next menu
screen will appear.

p The way to display the menu differs depending on the disc. For details, refer to
the instructions provided with disc.

Searching for a desired scene,
starting playback from a
specified time
You can search for a desired scene by specifying a title or a chapter, and the time.
p Chapter search and time search are not
possible when disc playback has been
stopped.
1 Touch [10Key Search] and then touch
[Title] (title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time]
(time).

2 Touch the keys to input the desired
number.
For titles, chapters
! To select 3, touch [3].
! To select 10, touch [1] and [0] in order.
! To select 23, touch [2] and [3] in order.

For time (time search)
! To select 21 minutes 03 seconds, touch [2],
[1], [Min], and [3], [Sec] in order.
! To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],
[1], [Min] in order.
p To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].

3 While the input number is displayed,
touch [Enter].
This starts playback from the selected scene.
p With discs featuring a menu, you can also
touch [Menu] or [Top Menu] and then
make selections from the displayed menu.

Entering the numerical commands
You can use this function when you need to
enter a numerical command during DVD playback.
1 Touch [10Key Search] and then touch
[10key Mode] (10key mode).

106

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
2 Touch 0 — 9 to input the desired number.
3 While the input number is displayed,
touch [Enter].

Operating the Radio (FM)

Touch panel key operation
% Touch the source icon and then touch
[FM] to select the radio (FM).
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
Touch panel keys

You can listen to the radio by using the navigation system. This section describes operations
for Radio (FM).

2
4

Selecting [FM] as the source
% Touch the source icon and touch [FM].
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 97

Screen configuration
1

3 4 7
6

1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Band indicator
Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1
to FM3.
3 Preset number indicator
Shows the program type of the current station
(when available).
4 Frequency indicator
Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned.
5 Preset list display
Shows the preset list.
6 LOCAL indicator
Shows when local seek tuning is on.
7 STEREO indicator
Shows that the frequency selected is being
broadcast in stereo.

1 Touch: Recall the preset station
Touch and hold: Store the broadcast
station
You can register the frequency currently
being received to the preset list. You can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies
for later recall with the touch of a key.
p Touch to recall the preset frequency.
p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three FM
bands can be stored in memory.
2 Touch: Perform manual tuning
To perform manual tuning, touch
or
briefly. The frequencies move up
or down one step.
Touch and hold: Perform seek tuning
To perform seek tuning, keep touching
or
for about one second
and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough
for good reception is found.
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching
either
or
briefly.
p If you keep touching
or
, you can skip broadcasting frequencies. Seek tuning starts as soon as
you release the keys.
p You can also perform these operations
by using TRK (c/d) button.
3 Tune in strong signals
= For details, refer to Tuning in strong signals on page 109
4 Store the strongest broadcast frequencies

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

107

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

= For details, refer to Storing the strongest
broadcast frequencies on the next page
5 Select a FM band
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired
FM band is displayed, FM 1, FM 2 or FM 3.
p This function is convenient to prepare
different preset lists for each band.

Storing the strongest
broadcast frequencies
“BSM” (best stations memory) lets you automatically store the six strongest broadcast frequencies under preset tuning keys [P1] — [P6]
and once stored there you can tune in to those
frequencies with a touch of the key.

Operating the Radio (AM)
You can listen to the radio by using the navigation system. This section describes operations
for Radio (AM).

Selecting [AM] as the source
% Touch the source icon and touch [AM].
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 97

Screen configuration
1

% Touch and hold [BSM].
“BSM” starts. The six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning
keys [P1] — [P6] in order of their signal
strength.
p To cancel the storage process, touch [Cancel].
p Storing broadcast frequencies with “BSM”
may replace broadcast frequencies you
have saved using [P1] — [P6].

Tuning in strong signals
Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those
radio stations with sufficiently strong signals
for good reception.
1
2

1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Preset number indicator
Shows what preset has been selected.
3 Frequency indicator
Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned.
4 Preset list display
Shows the preset list.
5 LOCAL indicator
Shows when local seek tuning is on.

Touch [Local].
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.
p To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].

3 Touch [c] or [d] to set the sensitivity.
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM.
Level: 1 — 2 — 3 — 4
The level “4” setting allows reception of only
the strongest stations, while lower settings let
you receive weaker stations.

108

Touch panel key operation
% Touch the source icon and then touch
[AM] to select the radio (AM).
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies

Touch panel keys

2
4

% Touch and hold [BSM].
“BSM” starts. The six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning
keys P1 — P6 in order of their signal strength.
p To cancel the storage process, touch [Cancel].
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM
may replace broadcast frequencies you
have saved using P1 — P6.

Tuning in strong signals
Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those
radio stations with sufficiently strong signals
for good reception.
1
2

Touch [Local].
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.
p To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].

3 Touch c or d to set the sensitivity.
There are two levels of sensitivity for AM.
Level: 1 — 2
The level “2” setting allows reception of only
the strongest stations, while lower settings let
you receive weaker stations.

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

1 Select a desired frequency from the list
Touch to recall the preset frequency.
p To register the frequency currently being
received to the preset list, touch and
hold the preset list.
Touch and hold: Store broadcast stations
You can register the frequency currently
being received to the preset list. You can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies
for later recall with the touch of a key.
p Touch to recall the preset frequency.
p Up to 6 stations can be stored in memory.
2 Touch: Perform manual tuning
To perform manual tuning, touch
or
briefly. The frequencies move up
or down one step.
Touch and hold: Perform seek tuning
To perform seek tuning, keep touching
or
for about one second
and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough
for good reception is found.
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching
either
or
briefly.
p If you keep touching
or
, you can skip broadcasting frequencies. Seek tuning starts as soon as
you release the keys.
p You can also perform these operations
by using TRK (c/d) button.
3 Tune in strong signals
= For details, refer to Tuning in strong signals on the previous page
4 Store the strongest broadcast frequencies
= For details, refer to Storing the strongest
broadcast frequencies on this page

“BSM” (best stations memory) lets you automatically store the six strongest broadcast frequencies under preset tuning keys P1 — P6
and once stored there you can tune in to those
frequencies with the touch of a key.

109

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Music Library)
You can record tracks from a music CD to the
hard disk in the navigation system. The music
library function enables you to record music
CDs on the hard disk in the navigation system
and play them back with various methods. To
use the music library, start by recording sound
sources from the CD.

4
5

Music Library Recording
When you play back a music CD that is not recorded on the navigation system, the system
automatically begins recording that CD to the
music library. This section describes cautions
and recording procedure.
p The music library can record up to 200 general music CDs worth of music data. (This
is just an average number and varies depending on the size of music data contained in the CDs.)
Screen configuration
2
4 1

7
3

“100%” appears to indicate that the recording
has completed. You can touch [Stop] to switch
the screen and perform another operation.
1 Recording mode indicator
Shows the current recording mode.
= For details, refer to Setting the CD recording
mode on page 152
2 Recording progress indicator
Shows the progress of the recording. Fractions show number of recorded tracks total
number of tracks in the CD.
3 Recording indicator

110

8
9

Shows the recording status.
(Red) indicates that recording is in progress.
(Blue)
indicates preparing recording.
Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
Track indicator
Shows the number and title of the track currently playing.
Artist name indicator
Shows the name of the artist currently playing. (when available.)
Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current
track.
Track list
Shows tracks in the CD.
Record status of tracks
: Recorded track
(Red): Track being recorded
(Blue): Track is not recorded yet

p Track selection operation or special playback functions such as random play are
disabled until recording finishes. To select tracks or perform special playback
functions, touch [Stop] to stop recording.
Title display
Music recognition technology and related
data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is
the industry standard in music recognition
technology and related content delivery. For
more information visit www.gracenote.com.
p Title information will be displayed when the
information is found in the Gracenote® Database on the built-in hard disk drive. If you
insert a CD-TEXT disc, the system prioritized a title information encoded in CDTEXT disc.
p When multiple options for the title information are found or no title information exists,
[-] is displayed. A title may be displayed if
you update the title information manually
after recording has finished.
= For details, refer to Assigning another
candidate for title information on page 122

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

Recording all tracks in a CD
When you play back a CD that is not recorded,
it is automatically recorded in the music library (hard disk drive).
p All tracks are automatically recorded
(Auto) in the default setting.
= For details, refer to Setting the CD recording
mode on page 152
% Insert the CD that you want to record.
Recording automatically starts.
p To cancel the recording, touch [Stop].

When recording finishes, the system returns
to the normal playback screen of the CD in the
blank between current track and next track.
p If the CD is scratched or damaged, no data
can be recorded on that part. In such a
case, the track that falls on that part may be
skipped.

Recording a CD manually
You can record only your favorite tracks in the
CD.
1 [REC Mode] is set to [Manual].
= For details, refer to Setting the CD recording
mode on page 152
p REC Mode cannot be changed during recording.

Play back the track you want to record.

3 Touch [REC].
The track being played is recorded.
When recording finishes, the system returns
to the normal playback screen of the CD in the
end of the track.
p To cancel the recording, touch [Stop].

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

p If no title information exists in the Gracenote® Database on the built-in hard disk
drive, the date when the track was recorded
is entered automatically. If you want to display the title information, enter the title
manually after recording has finished.
= For more details about “Changing the
title of the playlist or track”, refer to Editing
a playlist or tracks on page 117
p The title information displayed on the CD
playback screen and the recording screen
is synchronized with the one edited in the
music library. If you edit the title information in the music library, the title displayed
on each screen will change accordingly.
= For details, refer to Editing a playlist or
tracks on page 117
p Title information can only be edited when
one or more tracks are recorded in the
music library.
p Once you record a CD-TEXT disc, the title
information encoded in CD-TEXT disc is
also stored into the hard disk drive. (If you
edit the title information with the Music library, the edited title will be shown.)

Recording only the first track of
a CD
You can record only the first track of the CD.
This mode is useful when you want to record
only the first tracks from multiple CD singles
(or EPs) consecutively.
1 [REC Mode] is set to [Single].
= For details, refer to Setting the CD recording
mode on page 152
p REC Mode cannot be changed during recording.

2 Insert the CD you want to record.
Recording automatically starts for the first
track.
When recording finishes, the system returns
to the normal playback screen of the CD in the
end of the track.
p To cancel the recording, touch [Stop].

Stopping CD recording
You can stop recording while recording a CD.
(Recording can resume depending on the recording mode.)
% Touch [Stop].
When REC Mode is [Auto] or [Single]:

111

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Music Library)
Recording is paused, and the system starts
normal CD playback. To resume recording,
touch [REC]. Recording also resumes in the
following cases:
! When you switch to another source, and
then return to the CD source.
! When you turn off the ignition switch of the
vehicle, and then restart the engine.

When REC Mode is [Manual]:
Recording is stopped. Touch [REC] to record
the track being played.

Also see “Notes for Hard Disk Drive” for more
cautions about handling hard disk drive.
= For details, refer to Notes for Hard Disk Drive
on page 24

Music Library Play
You can play back or edit the tracks recorded
in the hard disk drive in the source named
music library (LIBRARY).

Notes on CD recording
p Operations on the navigation system may
take more time during recording than normal.
p Tracks from a CD are recorded in 4 times
speed. You can listen to that sound during
recording.
p The data is recorded using a highly efficient
compression method, so the sound may
slightly differ from the original depending
on the sound source. Noise may be heard
in some cases, but this is not an malfunction.
p Recording is possible only with a CD that
contains 44.1 kHz, 16-bit-stereo PCM digital
audio data.
p Recording (or copying) to the music library
is not possible from recording media (such
as CD-Rs) in which a CD or other data is digitally stored. This is due to the Serial Copy
Management System (SCMS) that was developed to prevent second-generation or serial copies.
p Recording to the music library is not possible from media (such as CD-Rs) in which
MP3 files are stored.
p When you are recording a CD with no track
intervals (such as a live concert CD), if the
engine stops and the power turns off, the
sound may break in a track when the
music data is played back.

112

Selecting [LIBRARY] as the source
% Touch the source icon and touch
[LIBRARY].
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 97

Screen configuration
Music Library (LIBRARY)
1
2
3
4
5

1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Group name indicator
Shows the group currently playing.
3 Playlist name indicator
Shows the playlist currently playing.
4 Track indicator
Shows the number and title of the track currently playing.
5 Playback method indicator
Shows which playback method has been selected.
6 Artist name indicator
Shows the name of the artist currently playing. (when available.)
7 Play time indicator

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

Group

Playlist

Tracks for a playlist

[Albums]

400

[Artists]

400

[Genres]

400

[My Favorites]

If you try to record one playlist more than
the number listed above, the oldest playlist
will be deleted.

Touch panel key operation
Listening to a track recorded in the
Music Library
% Touch the source icon and then touch
[LIBRARY].
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
Touch panel keys

Relationship of groups, playlists, and
tracks
The music library is organized as follows with
three levels: groups, playlists, and tracks.

3
2
7
a

There are four types of groups:
! Album group ([Albums]):
Stores the recorded track data in its original order. One playlist is automatically created when a CD is recorded.
! Artist group ([Artists]):
Stores playlists in which tracks are sorted
by artist names.
! Genre group ([Genres]):
Stores playlists in which tracks are sorted
by genres.
! My Favorite group ([My Favorites]):
Stores playlists registered with your favorite
selection.
! Maximum number you can register

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current
track.
8 Track list and playlist
Shows the track list or the playlist currently
playing or temporary displayed.
The icon on the left indicates that the item
is a “Playlist”, and the icon indicates that
the item is a “Track”.

6 8

1 Select a desired track from the list
Touch a desired track to play.
p Touching or switches to the next or
previous page in the list.
2 Playback and Pause
Touching f switches between “playback”
and “pause”.
3 Touch: Skip the track forward or backward
Touching p skips to the start of the next
track. Touching o once skips to the start
of the current track. Touching again will
skip to the previous track.
Touch and hold: fast backward or forward

113

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

114

p You can also perform these operations
by using TRK (c/d) button.
View upper contents
Touching
displays the contents of the
upper playlist or group.
p You cannot touch
on the group selection screen.
= For more details about “Relationship of
groups, playlists, and tracks”, refer to
Screen configuration on page 112
Display group selection screen
You can search a track from categories.
= For more details about “Search for a playlist”, refer to Searching a track from the playlist on this page
Display the details information screen
Displays the information about the track or
playlist displayed in blue on the track list.
On the details information, you can delete
the track or edit the track information.
= For details, refer to Editing a playlist or
tracks on page 117
Touch and hold: Register the track in
My Mix.
= For details, refer to Registering a track to
“My Mix” playlist in one action on page 116
Repeat play
Each touch of
changes the repeat
range as follows:
! Track Repeat — Repeat just the current
track
! Playlist Repeat — Repeat just the current playlist
! No display — Repeat the currently selected group
p Repeat play may stop if you perform an
operation that affects a track outside the
repeating range during track repeat
play.
p If you perform random play or scan play
during track repeat play, the repeating
range changes to Playlist Repeat.
Play tracks in random order
The selected tracks in the repeated range
are randomly played.
p Random play may stop if you perform
an operation that affects a track outside
the repeating range or perform repeat

play or scan play during track repeat
play.
p When the range of repeat play is
Track Repeat, if you perform random
play, the repeating range changes to
Playlist Repeat.
Indicator

Implication

[Random] only

Tracks of all playlists in the
group are played in random
order.

[Playlist Repeat] and [Random]

Tracks in the selected playlist are played in random
order.

a Scan play
Scan play will be performed for the selected
repeat range.
p When the range of repeat play is
Track Repeat, if you perform scan play,
the repeating range changes to
Playlist Repeat.
p When you find the desired track, touch
to turn scan play off.
p After track or playlist scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will
begin again.
Indicator

Implication

[Scan] only

The beginning of the first
tracks of each playlist in the
group is played for about 10
seconds.

[Playlist Repeat] and
[Scan]

The beginning of each track
in the selected playlist is
played for about 10 seconds.

Searching a track from the playlist
Once tracks are recorded, the navigation system categorizes them in a “Group”, and several types of playlists are automatically
created. A playlist is a list that shows the playback order of tracks.
= For more details about “Relationship of
groups, playlists, and tracks”, refer to Screen
configuration on page 112

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

Search a playlist by genre

Select a playlist formed by an album, and play
it back.

Select a playlist formed by a genre, and play it
back.
p Only the genre of a recorded track is displayed in a genre playlist.

1 Touch [Search].
The group selection screen appears.
2

Touch [Albums].

1 Touch [Search].
The group selection screen appears.
2 Touch [Genres].
“Genre” playlist appears.
3 Touch the genre (“Genre” playlist) you
want to play back.

3 Touch the album name (“Album” playlist) you want to play back.

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

Searching for an album

The first track in the selected playlist is played
back.

Searching the playlist by artist
Select a playlist formed by an artist, and play it
back.
1 Touch [Search].
The group selection screen appears.
2 Touch [Artists].
“Artist” playlist appears.
3 Touch the artist name (“Artist” playlist)
you want to play back.

The first track in the selected playlist is played
back.
En

115

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Music Library)
Creating a playlist with a
customized order
You can register your favorite tracks as a playlist, and play them back in desired order.
[My Favorites] group has two types of playlists.

3 Touch the playlist ([My Favorite 1] to
[My Favorite 4] or [My Mix]) in which you
want to register the track.

4 Touch [Yes].
The track is registered in the selected My Favorite playlist.
“My Mix” playlist:
You can register the track being played in one
action.
“My Favorite 1-4” playlist:
You can register tracks from the detailed
screen information.

Registering a track to “My Mix”
playlist in one action
You can register the track being played to the
favorite playlist called “My Mix”.
% Touch and hold [Memo] while playing
back the track you want to register.
The track being played is registered in
“My Mix” playlist.

116

Registering multiple tracks at a time
1 Play back the playlist that contains the
tracks you want to register.
2 Touch
lists.

to display the list of play-

3 Touch
, then touch
[Add to My Favorites].
The item displayed in blue is the selected playlist.
4 Touch the playlist ([My Favorite 1] to
[My Favorite 4] or [My Mix]) in which you
want to register the tracks.
5 Touch the tracks you want to register.
When you touch a track, a check mark appears indicating that it is selected. To deselect
it, touch the track again.
Touch d to proceed to the next operation.

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

4 Touch [Back] to return the previous
screen.

Select All:
Selects all tracks in the playlist.
All Off:
Cancels selection of all tracks in the playlist.
6

5 Touch
level.

to return to the previous

Touch [Back].

7 Touch [Yes].
The tracks are registered in the selected
“My Favorite” playlist.

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

= For details, refer to Operating the track edit
mode on the next page

p Up to 99 tracks can be registered in one
“My Favorite” playlist.

Editing a playlist or tracks
You can edit the tracks or playlist recorded in
the Music library.
Only the playlists and tracks in [Albums]
group and [My Favorites] group can be edited. In [Artist] group, only the pronunciation
of the artist playlist can be edited.

The item displayed in blue is the selected playlist.
.
6 Touch
The system enters the playlist edit mode.

Switching to the edit mode
1 Touch the playlist in [Albums],
[My Favorites], or [Artists].
2 Touch the track you want to edit.
The item displayed in blue is the track currently playing.
3 Touch
.
The system enters the track edit mode.

p To return to the previous screen, touch
[Back].

Operating the playlist edit mode
“Album” playlist:

117

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Music Library)
All editing operations are possible. The edited
contents will be reflected to all groups in the
hard disk drive.

8 Add the selected tracks to “My Favorite”
= For details, refer to Registering multiple
tracks at a time on page 116

Operating the track edit mode

1
2
3

“Album” playlist:
All items can be edited except for 5. The edited contents will be reflected to all groups in
the hard disk drive.
4

“My Mix” playlist, “My Favorite” playlist:
Only 4, 6, and 8 can be performed.

1
2
3
4

“My Mix” playlist, “My Favorite” playlist:
Only 5, 6, 8 can be performed.
4

1 Enter a desired playlist title
= For details, refer to Changing the title of the
playlist or track on the next page
2 Edit the pronunciation that is used as a
voice command for voice recognition
= For details, refer to Changing the pronunciation of a playlist name or track name on the
next page
3 Enter a desired artist name
= For details, refer to Renaming an artist
name in the playlist or track on page 120
4 Sort playback order of the playlists
= For details, refer to Sorting the playlists on
page 120
5 Delete the playlist
= For details, refer to Deleting a playlist on
page 121
6 Delete the selected tracks from that playlist
= For details, refer to Deleting a track from the
playlist on page 121
7 Update title information
= For details, refer to Assigning another candidate for title information on page 122

118

1 Enter a desired track title
= For details, refer to Changing the title of the
playlist or track on the next page
2 Edit the pronunciation that is used as a
voice command for voice recognition
= For details, refer to Changing the pronunciation of a playlist name or track name on the
next page
3 Enter a desired artist name
= For details, refer to Renaming an artist
name in the playlist or track on page 120
4 Change genre
= For details, refer to Changing the genre of a
track on page 122
5 Change the order to play back tracks

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

Changing the title of the playlist or track
You can change titles of playlists or tracks. The
titles changed here are displayed on the
screen.
1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track
edit mode.
= For details, refer to Switching to the edit
mode on page 117
2

Touch [Title].

3 Touch [Yes].
The content to be changed in Step 4 can be reflected to the voice command.
[No]:
Proceeds to the next step without registering it
as a voice command.
4 Enter a new character string, and then
touch [OK].
p Touch [Small] to enter lowercase letters.
Touch [Caps.] to enter uppercase letters.
Touch to toggle the selection.

The system pronounces the character string
once, and the pronunciation confirmation
message appears.
[No]:
Completes the edit without editing the pronunciation.
[Repeat]:
You can listen to the pronunciation again.
p If the pronunciation is not the desired one,
edit the characters so that the pronunciation matches your desired pronunciation.

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

= For details, refer to Sorting the tracks in
“My Mix” (“My Favorite”) playlist on page
121
6 Delete the current track
= For details, refer to Deleting the current
track on page 121
7 Update track title information
= For details, refer to Assigning another candidate for title information on page 122
8 Add the track to “My Favorite”
= For details, refer to Register tracks one by
one on page 116

5 Touch [Yes].
The changed character string is fixed and the
system returns to the previous screen.

Changing the pronunciation of a
playlist name or track name
You can change the pronunciation of a playlist
or track name. The pronunciation is used as a
command for voice recognition.
p Only pronunciation can be edited for
“Artist” playlist.
p The navigation system recognizes only the
voice recognition characters registered in
the current language. If you change the interface language, the voice recognition
character registered before you change the
language will not be recognized.
1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track
edit mode.
= For details, refer to Switching to the edit
mode on page 117
2

Touch

119

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

3 Enter a new character string, and then
touch [OK].
The system pronounces the character once,
and the pronunciation confirmation message
appears. Touch [Yes] to fix the change.
[No]:
Returns to the detailed information screen.
[Repeat]:
You can listen to the pronunciation again.

1 Enter the playlist edit mode.
= For details, refer to Switching to the edit
mode on page 117
2

Touch [Sort Playlists].

3 Touch the playlist that you want to
change the order for.

p If the pronunciation is not the desired one,
edit the characters so that the pronunciation matches your desired pronunciation.

4 Touch [Yes].
The changed character is fixed and the system
returns to the previous screen.

4 Touch , , , or to determine the position you want to put.

Renaming an artist name in the
playlist or track
You can rename the artist name in the playlist
or track.
1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track
edit mode.
= For details, refer to Switching to the edit
mode on page 117
2

Touch [Artist].

3 Touch [Select from history List].
[Keyboard Input]:
The character input screen appears, and you
can change the artist name with the keyboard.
4 Select an artist name from the list.
The artist name is changed to the one you selected. In the playlist edit mode, touching
[Yes] changes the artist name to the one you
selected.

:
Moves playlists by page.
:
Moves playlists one by one.

Sorting the playlists

5 Touch the selected playlist again.
The position of that playlist is fixed.

The playback order of playlists in the group
can be changed.
p If there is only one playlist, the playback
order cannot be changed.

120

6 Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to change the
playback order of other playlists.
7 Touch [ESC].
The new order is fixed, and the system returns
to the normal playback screen.

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

The playback order of tracks in “My Mix” playlist and “My Favorite” playlist can be changed.
1 Enter the track edit mode.
= For details, refer to Switching to the edit
mode on page 117
2

Touch [Sort Tracklists].

3 Touch the track that you want to
change.
4 Touch , , , or to determine the position you want to put.
5 Touch the selected track again.
The destination is fixed.
6 Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to change the
playback order of other tracks.

Deleting a track from the playlist
You can delete tracks from the playlist.
p If you delete a track in [Albums] group, the
track is deleted from the hard disk drive. (It
is deleted from [My Favorites] group at the
same time.)
p If you delete the track, the system does not
delete the edited title information.
p If you delete the tracks in “My Mix” playlist
or “My Favorite” playlist, they are only deleted from the playlist, and not from the
hard disk drive.
1 Enter the playlist edit mode.
= For details, refer to Switching to the edit
mode on page 117
2

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

Sorting the tracks in “My Mix”
(“My Favorite”) playlist

Touch [Delete Tracks].

3 Touch the tracks you want to delete.
When you touch a track, a check mark appears indicating that it is selected. To deselect
it, touch the track again.

7 Touch [ESC].
The new order is fixed, and the system returns
to the normal playback screen.

Deleting a playlist
You can delete a playlist in [Albums] group.
(You cannot delete playlists in other groups.)
p If you delete a playlist in [Albums] group,
all tracks in the playlist are deleted from
the hard disk drive. (They are deleted from
[My Favorites] group at the same time.)
p If you delete the playlist, the system does
not delete the edited title information, such
as album title, artist name, or track name.
1 Enter the playlist edit mode.
= For details, refer to Switching to the edit
mode on page 117
2

Touch [Delete This Playlist].

3 Touch [Yes].
The playlist is deleted.

Touch d to proceed to the next operation.
[Select All]:
Selects all tracks in the playlist.
[All Off]:
Cancels the selection of all tracks in the playlist.
4

Touch [Back].

Touch [Yes].

Deleting the current track
p If you delete the track, the track is deleted
from the hard disk drive. (It is deleted from
[My Favorites] group at the same time.)
p If you delete the track, the system does not
delete the edited title information.
En

121

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

p If you delete the tracks in “My Mix” playlist
or “My Favorite” playlist, they are only deleted from the playlist, and not from the
hard disk drive.
1 Enter the track edit mode.
= For details, refer to Switching to the edit
mode on page 117
2

Touch [Delete This Track].

Touch [Yes].

p Once you update the title information, the
information you edit before will be overwritten by the title information of the Gracenote® Database.
Gracenote® Database updates are available.
You can download the latest update from
Pioneer website by using your PC. To install the
update, burn the data onto a CD-R(-RW) and
insert it into your navigation system. When you
download the files and install the update, follow the instructions in the website.

Changing the genre of a track
1 Enter the track edit mode.
= For details, refer to Switching to the edit
mode on page 117
2

Touch [Genres].

Select the desired genre from the list.

The genre is changed, and the system returns
to the previous screen.

Assigning another candidate
for title information
If the current title information is not desired
title, you can search for another title information from Gracenote® Database in the hard
disk drive manually and assign another candidate. If there were multiple options for the title
information, you can select one title from
them.
p Music recognition technology and related
data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content
delivery. For more information visit
www.gracenote.com.

122

1 Select the playlist in [Albums] group,
and enter the playlist edit mode or track
edit mode.
= For details, refer to Switching to the edit
mode on page 117
2 Touch [Update Title].
Information search begins. When the title information is obtained, the candidates screen
appears.
3 Select the desired album title from the
list.
The title information is updated to the one you
selected.

Chapter

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)
Operating the XM Satellite
Radio

Selecting [XM] as the source
% Touch the source icon and touch [XM].
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 97

GEX-P910XM, GEX-P900XM
1

About the logo for channel name
Only the logo data that is contained in the navigation system can be displayed for each
channel. The logo of a newly established channel that is not contained cannot be displayed.
When no logo can be displayed, the following
substitute icon is displayed.

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

You can use the navigation system to control
an XM satellite digital tuner, which is sold separately.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
XM tuner’s operation manuals. This section
provides information on XM operations with
the navigation system which differs from that
described in the XM tuner’s operation manual.

Substitute icon

Screen configuration
GEX-P10XMT, GEX-P920XM
All CH Mode
2
1

7
8

Category Mode

1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 XM band indicator
Shows the XM band which has been selected.
3 XM channel number indicator
Shows XM channel number the tuner is currently tuned to.
4 XM station name indicator
Shows XM broadcast station name the tuner
is currently tuned to.
5 XM channel select mode indicator
Shows what channel select mode has been
selected. You can select a channel from all
channels in All CH Mode, and select a channel from selected category in
Category Mode.
= For details, refer to Touch panel key operation on the next page
6 XM channel category
Shows the category of broadcast channel.
7 XM station name logo

p The message “-ON THE AIR-“ disappears if the navigation system cannot receive XM tuner reception for some
reason.

123

Chapter

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)
p If you use GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM,
the logo for channel name is not available.
8 Detail information
Shows the detailed information of the broadcast channel currently being received.
9 Category icon
Shows the category icon for the selected
channel.

Touch panel key operation
% Touch the source icon and then touch
[XM] to select the XM.
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
Touch panel keys (GEX-P10XMT, GEXP920XM)
Page 1 (All CH Mode)

1
2
5
4
3

Page 1 (Category Mode)

b
2
5
4
3

Page 2

7
8
9
a

Touch panel keys (GEX-P910XM or GEXP900XM)

124

Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be
used on GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM.
1 Touch: Recalling channels from the preset
Touch to recall the preset channel.
p In All CH Mode, you can also recall the
preset channel by pressing the P.LIST
(a/b) button.
p In Category Mode, the screen shows
category search.
Touch and hold: Storing broadcast stations
You can register the channel currently
being broadcast to the preset list.
p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three XM
bands can be stored in memory.
p If you use GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM,
the channel number does not appear on
the touch panel key.
2 Perform manual tuning
The channels move up or down one at a
time.
p If you keep touching
or
you can skip broadcasting
channels.
p You can also perform these operations
by using the TRK (c/d) button.
3 Switching to the list display*
You can select a desired channel from the
list display.
= For details, refer to Selecting a channel
from the XM channel list display on the next
page
4 Switching the XM channel select mode
You can switch the mode between the two
methods for selecting and listing the channel.
All CH Mode :

Chapter

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

6
7

a
b

Each touch of [DISP] changes the display
on the bottom of the detail information as
follows:
GEX-P900XM:
Channel name — Artist name/feature —
Song/program title — Information — Channel number
GEX-P910XM:
Channel name — Artist name/feature —
Song/program title — Channel category
p This function is not available with GEXP10XMT and GEX-P920XM.

Display the Radio ID
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is displayed.
1

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

You can select a channel from all channels
when you operate.
Category Mode :
You can select a channel within selected category when you operate.
Select an XM band
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired
XM band is displayed, XM 1, XM 2 or
XM 3. This is useful for switching the preset.
Switching the touch panel keys to next
page
Memorizing the current song*
The song title and artist name being broadcast will be memorized in “My Mix”. When a
song that matches the song information
memorized in “My Mix” is broadcast, you
can tune the channel to the one that is
broadcasting that song.
= For details, refer to Memorizing the song
title and the artist name of a song on the
next page
Setting the notification of the memorized songs*
You can set an alert for the songs memorized in “My Mix”. You can also delete the
memorized song.
= For details, refer to Setting the alert for
each memorized song on the next page
= For details, refer to Deleting the memorized songs on page 127
Selecting an XM channel directly
You can select an XM channel directly by
entering the desired channel number.
Enter the channel number, touch [Enter],
and then touch [Back].
p To cancel the input numbers, touch
[Clear].
p This function in not available with GEXP900XM.
Switching the touch panel keys to previous page
Switching the channel category
Touch [Up] or [Down] to select the desired
category.
Switching the XM information

Touch [10Key Direct].

2 Input [000] and then touch [Enter].
If you select another channel, display of the
Radio ID is canceled.
p You can also display the Radio ID to select
[RADIO ID] from channel category in the
Category Mode.

Selecting a channel from the
XM channel list display
The list content can be switched so you can
search for the track you want to listen to not
only by the channel name but also by the artist
name or song title.
p The channel list shows all channels during
All CH Mode, and the channels included
in the selected category during
Category Mode. To switch the channel
mode, touch [Mode].
1 Touch [List].
XM channel list appears in the display.
Each touch of [List] changes the settings as
follows:
Detail information display — Ch Name List
(Channel name) — Song Title List (Song title)
— Artist Name List (Artist name)

125

Chapter

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)
2 Touch the desired channel that you
want to listen to.
Touch or to switch to the next page or previous page.
p During Category Mode, touch [Up] or
[Down] to switch to another category.

Using “My Mix” function
“My Mix” function memorizes the song title
and artist name of the song currently being received. When the song that matches the memorized song title and artist name is being
broadcast on a station other than the one you
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you
can switch the station to listen to that song.
A track itself is NOT downloaded. ONLY the
song title and the artist name are memorized.

Memorizing the song title and the
artist name of a song
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to can be memorized to “My Mix”.
% Touch and hold [Memo].
The song title and artist name of current song
you are listening to are memorized, and a confirmation message appears.
p The song title and artist name of up to 15
songs can be memorized. Trying to save
more than 15 songs will overwrite old ones.
p The song title or the artist name cannot be
memorized when [————————] is
displayed on the title information.
p This function invalid for the channel 000.
p There is a possibility the memorized title is
not displayed correctly.

126

= For details, refer to Setting the alert for
each memorized song on this page
= For details, refer to Switching the alert
setting on this page
p If there is slight difference between the
memorized title and the title of the song
being broadcast, no notification will be provided though they are the same song.
p Alert may not be provided depending on
the situation of the navigation system.

Setting the alert for each memorized
song
You can change the setting of the alert when
the track is broadcast again. You can enable
or disable alert for each song.
1 Touch [Memo Edit].
Memorized song list (“My Mix” list) will be displayed. If the alert setting for the song is on,
the square on the right is blue. Otherwise, the
square is inactive.
2 Touch the song title that you want to
exclude from the alert target.

The square on the right turn inactive and the
song title is excluded from the alert target.
p If you touch that again, the square will turn
blue and the song title is included in the
alert target.

When the memorized song is broadcast

Switching the alert setting

Alert message is displayed. Touch [Yes] to
switch to that station, and you can listen to
that track.
p If the memorized song is not selected in
“My Mix” list or [Alert Off] is selected, no
notification will be provided even when that
song is broadcast.

You can enable or disable the alert for all
items at once. This function will be useful
when you want to turn the alert off temporarily
without changing the condition of each memorized song.

Touch [Memo Edit].

Chapter

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

Deleting the memorized songs
You can delete each one of the memorized
songs from the song title list.
1

Touch [Memo Edit].

2 Touch and hold the track you want to
delete.
A message will appear asking you to confirm
the deletion.
p To delete all songs that are memorized,
touch [Delete All].

Touch [Yes].

Using the direct traffic
announcement function
You can listen to the memorized “Instant Traffic & Weather” channel by directly calling it up
with the T button on the navigation unit. (Only
one station can be memorized.)
p This function is not available with GEXP910XM and GEX-P900XM.

Memorize a “Instant Traffic &
Weather” channel
1 Tune into “Instant Traffic & Weather”
channel.
2 Press and hold T button for two seconds or more.
That “Instant Traffic & Weather” channel will
be memorized.
p The channel 000 and 001 can not be memorized newly (although the channel 001 is
the default).
p Even if you use the SiriusConnect universal
tuner together, only one station can be
memorized. The station memorized afterward will overwrite the existing one.

Calling up the memorized “Instant
Traffic & Weather” channel
% Press T button.

p You can call up a “Instant Traffic & Weather”
channel even from a source other than the
XM source.
p To cancel the announcement, touch
[TRFC Off] on the screen or press T button
again.

Operating the SIRIUS
Satellite Radio
You can use the navigation system to control a
SiriusConnect universal tuner, which is sold
separately. This section provides information
on SIRIUS operations with the navigation system which differs from that described in the
SiriusConnect universal tuner’s operation
manual.
p When you use the SiriusConnect universal
tuner (sold separately) with this Navigation
System, Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE is
required. For details concerning operation,
refer to the owner’s manual of Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE and SiriusConnect
universal tuner.
p The following function is not available if
this navigation system is connected to the
Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE CD-SB10
and the SiriusConnect universal tuner.
— Using Instant Replay function
p The following functions are not available in
SIR-PNR1.
— Selecting team for game alert
— Displaying game information
— Using the song alert function
— Using the direct traffic announcement
function

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

2 Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].
When the alert setting is [Alert Off],
is displayed on the information plate.

127

Chapter

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)
Selecting [SIRIUS] as the source

Touch panel key operation

% Touch the source icon and touch
[SIRIUS].
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 97
Screen configuration

% Touch the source icon and then touch
[SIRIUS] to select the SIRIUS.
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
Touch panel keys

Page 1 (All Ch Mode)

1
2
5
4
3

1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 SIRIUS band indicator
Shows the SIRIUS band which has been selected.
3 SIRIUS channel select mode indicator
Shows what channel select mode has been
selected. You can select a channel from all
channels in All Ch Mode, and select a
channel from the selected category in
Category Mode.
= For details, refer to Touch panel key operation on this page
4 SIRIUS channel number indicator
Shows the SIRIUS channel number that the
tuner is tuned to.
5 Detail information
Shows the detail information of the broadcast channel currently being received.
p The message “-ON THE AIR-” disappears if
the navigation system cannot receive SIRIUS tuner reception for some reason.

= For details, refer to Troubleshooting on page
174

128

Page 2 (All Ch Mode)

7
8
a
c
9b
Page 1 (Category Mode)

Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be
used on SIR-PNR1.
1 Touch: Recalling channels from the preset
Touch to recall the preset channel.
p In All Ch Mode, you can also recall the
preset channel by pressing the P.LIST
(a/b) button.
p In Category Mode, the screen displays
category search.
Touch and hold: Storing broadcast stations
You can register the channel currently
being broadcast to the preset list.

Chapter

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

6
7

9 Memorize the current song*
The song title and artist name being broadcast will be memorized in “My Mix”. When
the song that matches the song information memorized in “My Mix” is broadcast,
you can tune the channel to the one that is
broadcasting that song.
= For details, refer to Memorizing the song
title and the artist name of a song on page
131
a Set the notification of the memorized
songs*
You can set the alert for the songs memorized in “My Mix”. You can also delete the
memorized song.
= For details, refer to Setting the alert for
each memorized song on page 131
= For details, refer to Deleting the memorized songs on page 131
b Select a SIRIUS channel directly
The Channel number input screen appears.
You can select a SIRIUS channel directly by
entering the desired channel number.
While the input number is displayed, touch
[Enter], and then touch [Back].
p To cancel the input numbers, touch
[Clear].
c Switch the touch panel keys to previous
page
d Switch the channel category
Touch [Up] or [Down] to select the desired
category.

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three
SIRIUS bands can be stored in memory.
Perform manual tuning
The channels move up or down one at a
time.
p If you keep touching
or
you can skip broadcasting
channels.
p You can also perform these operations
by using the TRK (c/d) button.
Switch the SIRIUS display
Each touch of [DISP] changes the display
information.
Channel number — Channel name —
Channel category — Artist name/feature —
Song/program title — Composer
p Touch and hold to switch ON/OFF the information scroll.
Switch the SIRIUS channel select
mode
You can switch the mode between the two
methods for selecting and listing the channel.
All Ch Mode:
You can select a channel from all channels
when you operate.
Category Mode:
You can select a channel within selected category when you operate.
Select a SIRIUS band
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired
SIRIUS band is displayed, SIRIUS 1,
SIRIUS 2, or SIRIUS 3. This is useful for
switching the preset.
Switch the touch panel keys to next
page
Select team for game alert*
You can register your favorite team.
= For details, refer to Selecting teams for
Game Alert on this page
= For details, refer to Switching the Game
Alert on or off on the next page
Display game information*
You can display game information and
changes to the broadcast channel.
= For details, refer to Displaying game information (Game Info) on the next page

Selecting teams for Game Alert
This navigation system can alert you when
games involving your favorite teams are about
to start. To use this function you need to set
the game alert to the teams in advance.
1 Touch [Game Alert].
The League/Team Setting screen appears.

129

Chapter

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

2 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to select the
league.

When a game involving team is
broadcast
A message is displayed. Touch [Jump] to
switch to that station, and you can view to that
game information. If you touch [Stay], the
channel does not switch.
p Alert may not be provided depending on
the situation of the navigation system.

3 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to select the
team.

Displaying game information
(Game Info)

4 Touch [On/Off].
The team displayed as [On] is the alert target.

You can display the game information of a
team that you have set an alert for, and change
to the broadcast channel.
p This function is unavailable if no team is selected in the game alert function.
1 Touch [Game Info].
The game name and the broadcast channel
are also displayed.

Touch [Alert On].
p When the selected team is excluded from
the alert target, the team is displayed as
[Off]. Up to 12 teams can be selected.
When you have already made 12 team selections, Full is displayed and additional
team selection is not possible. In this case,
first delete the team selection and then try
again.

Switching the Game Alert on or off
You can enable or disable the alert for selected
items. This function will be useful when to
turn the alert off temporarily without changing
the setting of each selected team.
1 Touch [Game Alert].
The League/Team Setting screen appears.
2 Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].
When the alert setting is [Alert Off],
is displayed on the information plate.

130

2 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to view the
game score information which is registered.
p The game score will be updated automatically.
p Touch [Tune To] to switch to the channel
that broadcasts the displayed game.
p If you have not made any team selections,
Not Set is displayed.
p When games involving your favorite teams
are not currently playing, No Game is displayed.

Using “My Mix” function
“My Mix” function memorizes the song title
and artist name of the song currently being received. When the track that matches the memorized song title and artist name is being
broadcast on a station other than the one you
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you
can switch the station to listen to that song.
p A track itself is NOT downloaded. ONLY the
song title and the artist name are memorized.

Chapter

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)
Memorizing the song title and the
artist name of a song

2 Touch [Previous] and [Next] to select
the song title that you want to exclude
from the alert target.

% Touch and hold [Memo].
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to are memorized, and
[Song Saved] is displayed.
p The song title and artist name of up to 10
tracks can be memorized. If you try to save
more than 10 tracks [FULL] is displayed.
p You cannot memorize a song that does not
have song title and artist name information.
p There is a possibility the memorized title is
not displayed correctly.

When the memorized song is broadcast
Alert message is displayed. Touch [Jump] to
switch to that station, and you can listen to
that track. If you touch [Stay], the cannel does
not switch.
p If the alert for the song is “OFF” or
[Alert Off] is selected, no notification will
be provided even when that song is broadcast.
= For details, refer to Setting the alert for
each memorized song on this page
= For details, refer to Switching the alert
setting on this page
p If there is a slight difference between the
memorized title and the title of the track
being broadcast, no notification will be provided though they are the same song.
p Alert may not be provided depending on
the situation of the navigation system.

Setting the alert for each memorized
song
You can change the setting of the alert when
the track is broadcast again. You can enable
or disable alert for each song.

3 Touch [On/Off].
Each touch of [On/Off] turns the alert setting
for the song “On” or “Off”.

Switching the alert setting
You can enable or disable the alert for all
items at the time. This function will be useful
when you want to turn the alert off temporarily
without changing the condition of each memorized song.
1

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

The song title and artist name of the current
song you are listening to can be memorized to
“My Mix”.

Touch [Memo Edit].

2 Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].
When the alert setting is [Alert Off],
is displayed on the information plate.

Deleting the memorized songs
You can delete each one of the memorized
songs.
1

Touch [Memo Edit].

2 Touch [Previous] or [Next] to select the
song title that you want to delete.
3 Touch [Delete This Song] when the
song you want to delete is displayed.
A message will appear asking you to confirm
the deletion.
4

Touch [Yes].

1 Touch [Memo Edit].
“My Mix” setting screen will be displayed.
En

131

Chapter

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)
Using the Traffic & Weather
preset function
You can listen to the memorized Traffic &
Weather channel by directly calling it up with
the T button on the navigation system. (Only
one station can be memorized.)

Memorize a Traffic & Weather channel
1 Tune into the Traffic & Weather channel.
2 Press and hold T button for two seconds or more.
That Traffic & Weather channel will be memorized.
p Even if you use the XM satellite radio tuner
together, only one station can be memorized. The station memorized afterward will
overwrite the existing one.

Calling up the memorized Traffic &
Weather channel
% Press T button.

p You can call up a Traffic & Weather channel
even from a source other than the SIRIUS
source.
p To cancel the announcement, touch
[TRFC Off] on the screen or press T button
again.

132

Chapter

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)

Operating the Multi-CD Player
You can use the navigation system to control a
multi-CD player, which is sold separately.
p Only those functions described in this manual are available for multi-CD player. (Depending on the multi-CD player, the
function may be invalid.)

Selecting [M-CD] as the source
% Touch the source icon and touch
[M-CD].
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 97

Shows which repeat range has been selected.
5 Track number indicator
Shows the track currently playing.
6 Track title indicator*
Shows the title of the track currently playing.
7 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current
track.
8 Disc number display
Shows the number of the disc in the multi-CD
player.

p The titles of the items marked with an asterisk (*) will be displayed only when the CDTEXT disc is used. When using a normal
music CD, they are displayed as [-].

Touch panel key operation
% Touch the source icon and then touch
[M-CD] to select the multi-CD player.
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
Touch panel keys

3
2
8

Screen configuration
1

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)

When Pioneer audio equipment is connected
to the navigation system using IP-BUS or AVBUS, such equipment can be operated from
the navigation system. This chapter describes
the operation of the audio source that can be
used when the Pioneer audio equipment is
connected. When reading this chapter, please
also refer to the operation manual of the AV
equipment connected to the navigation system.

7
1

1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Disc number indicator
Shows the disc currently playing.
3 Disc title indicator*
Shows the title of the disc currently playing.
4 Playback method indicator

p When the multi-CD player has performed
the preparatory operations, Ready is displayed.
p If the multi-CD player does not operate
properly, an error message such as
Error-XX may be displayed. Refer to the
multi-CD player owner’s manual.
p If there are no discs in the multi-CD player
magazine, No Disc is displayed.
1 Change the disc in the magazine
2 Playback and Pause
Touching f switches between “playback”
and “pause”.

133

Chapter

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)
3 Touch: Skip forward or backward
Touching p skips to the start of the next
track. Touching o once skips to the start
of the current track. Touching again will
skip to the previous track.
Touch and hold: fast backward or forward
Keep touching o or p to perform fast
backward or forward.
p You can also perform these operations
by using TRK (c/d) button.
4 Play back the previous disc
The disc before the currently played disc
will be played.
5 Play back the next disc
The disc after the currently played disc will
be played.
6 Repeat play
Each touch of
changes the settings
as follows:
Track Repeat — Repeat just the current
track
Disc Repeat — Repeat the current disc
p If you select other discs during repeat
play, the repeat play range setting will
be canceled.
p If you perform track search or fast forward/rewind during Track Repeat, the
repeat play range changes to
Disc Repeat.
7 Play tracks in random order
Tracks will play in a random order within
the previously selected repeat ranges.
Indicator

Implication

[Random] only

Tracks of all disc in the
magazine are played in
random order.

[Disc Repeat]
and [Random]

Tracks in the selected
disc are played in random order.

p If you perform random play during
[Track Repeat], the repeat play range
changes to [Disc Repeat].
8 Scan play

134

The first 10 seconds of each track of the
current disc (or the first track of each disc)
are played.
Indicator

Implication

[Scan] only

The beginning of the
first tracks of each disc
is played for about 10
seconds.

[Disc Repeat]
and [Scan]

The beginning of each
track in the selected
disc is played for about
10 seconds.

p When you find the desired track (or disc)
touch
to turn scan play off.
p After track or disc scanning is finished,
normal playback of the tracks will begin
again.

Operating the iPod®
You can control an iPod by combining the
Pioneer Interface adapter for iPod (sold separately) to the navigation system. For details
concerning operation, refer to the owner’s
manual of the Interface adapter for iPod. This
section provides information on iPod operations with the navigation system that differ
from those described in the owner’s manual
of Interface adapter for iPod.
p When you use the iPod (sold separately)
with this Navigation System, Pioneer Interface adapter for iPod is required.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Selecting [iPod] as the source
% Touch the source icon and touch [iPod].
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 97

Chapter

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)
Screen configuration

Touch panel keys

2
1

8 3

4
6
7

5
a

1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Song number indicator
Shows the number of the song playing in the
selected list.
3 Repeat play indicator
Shows whether Repeat is selected for the current song or all songs on current list.
4 Shuffle play indicator
Shows whether Shuffle play is selected for
songs of albums.
5 Album title indicator
Shows the title of the album for the song.
6 Artist name indicator
Shows the name of the artist of the current
song.
7 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current
song.
8 Song title indicator
Shows the title of the current song.
9 Playing Song Information
Shows the information and status of the current song.
a Song title, Artist name, and Album title indicator
When playing a song, Song title, Artist name,
and Album title are displayed.

Touch panel key operation
% Touch the source icon and then touch
[iPod] to select the iPod.
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.

1 Playback and Pause
Touching f switches between “playback”
and “pause”.
2 Touch: Skip back or forward to another
song
Touching p skips to the start of the next
song. Touching o once skips to the start
of the current song. Touching again will
skip to the previous song.
Touch and hold: fast forward or rewind
p You can also perform these operation
with pressing TRK (c/d) button.
3 Display the previous screen
Touch on the refine search or other screen
to return to the previous screen.
4 Narrow down the songs to play back
You can narrow down the choices of songs
to play from five categories.
= For details, refer to Browsing for a song
on the next page
5 Repeat play
Touch
repeatedly until the desired repeat range appears in the display.
! Repeat One — Repeat just the current
song
! Repeat All — Repeat all songs in the
selected list
6 Shuffle play
This function shuffles songs or albums and
plays them in random order.
Each touch of
changes the settings
as follows:
! Shuffle Songs — Play back songs in
random order within the selected list

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)

2
1

135

Chapter

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)
! Shuffle Albums — Select an album
randomly, and then play back all songs
in that album in order

Browsing for a song
The operations for controlling an iPod with
this navigation system are designed to be
close to iPod operation. This allows you to
search and play songs as you would with an
iPod.
1 Touch [Search].
If you do nothing about 30 seconds after Steps
1 to 4 are finished, the screen returns to the
previous screen.
2 Touch one of the categories in which
you want to search for a song.
!
!
!
!
!

Playlists (playlists)
Artists (artists)
Albums (albums)
Songs (songs)
Genres (genres)

The search screen is displayed.
The icon on the left indicates that the item
is a “Playlist”, and the icon indicates that
the item is a “Song”.
p If you select [Songs], proceed to step 4.
p When you select [Artists], [Albums] or
[Genres], you can start a playback of all
songs in the selected list. To do this, keep
touching the list title.

3 Touch the title of the list that you want
to play.
Repeat this operation until you find the desired song.
p To return to the previous screen touch
.

136

4 From the song list, touch the song you
want to play.
p To go to the next page of the list, touch .
p To return to the previous page of the list,
touch .

Operating the TV tuner
CAUTION
For safety reasons, visual images cannot be
viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view visual images, you must stop in a safe place and
put on the parking brake before setting your route
(For details, refer to To ensure safe driving on page
22).

You can use the navigation system to control a
TV tuner (e.g. GEX-P6400TV, GEX-P5700TV),
which is sold separately. For details concerning operation, refer to the TV tuner’s operation
manual. This section provides information on
TV operations with the navigation system that
differ from those described in the TV tuner’s
operation manual. When you attempt to watch
visual images while driving, the warning ATTENTION! Viewing of front seat video
source while driving is strictly prohibited.
will appear on the screen.

Selecting [TV] as the source
% Touch the source icon and touch [TV].
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 97

Chapter

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)
Screen configuration
1

1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Band indicator
Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to:
TV 1 or TV 2.
3 Preset number indicator
Shows which preset has been selected.
4 Channel indicator
Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned
to.
5 Preset list display
Shows the preset list.

Touch panel key operation
% Touch the source icon and then touch
[TV] to select the TV tuner.
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
Touch panel keys

2
3

1 Select channels from the list
The list lets you see the list of channels and
select one of them to view.
p Touching or switches to the next or
previous page in the list.

p You can register your favorite channels
in the list.
= For details, refer to Storing and recalling
broadcast frequencies on this page
2 Touch: Perform manual tuning
The channels move up or down one step.
Touch and hold: Perform seek tuning
The tuner will scan the channels until a
broadcast strong enough for good reception is found.
p If you keep touching
or
you can skip broadcasting
channels. Seek tuning starts as soon as
you release the keys.
p You can also perform these operations
by using TRK (c/d) button.
3 Store the strongest broadcast stations
sequentially
Twelve channels with strong reception sensitivity can be registered automatically in
the preset list.
= For details, refer to Storing the strongest
broadcast stations sequentially on the next
page
4 Change band
Touching [Band] switches between “TV 1”
and “TV 2”.

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)

Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies
If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P1
— P12, you can easily store up to 12 broadcast
stations for later recall with a touch of the key.
% When you find a station that you want
to store in memory keep touching a preset
tuning key P1 — P12.
The selected station is stored in memory. The
next time you touch the same preset tuning
key P1 — P12 the station is recalled from
memory. To switch between P1 — P6 and P7
— P12, touch or . When the touch panel
keys are not displayed, you can display them
by touching the screen.
p Up to 24 stations, 12 for each of two TV
bands can be stored in memory.

137

Chapter

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)
p You can also press the P.LIST (a/b) button
to recall stations assigned to preset tuning
keys P1 — P12.

Storing the strongest broadcast
stations sequentially
% Touch and hold [BSSM].
BSSM starts. The 12 strongest broadcast stations will be stored under preset tuning keys
P1 — P12 in order from the lowest channel
up.
p To cancel the storage process, touch [Cancel].
p Storing broadcast stations with [BSSM]
may replace current broadcast stations
stored in preset memory.

138

Chapter

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)
Operating the AV Input source
CAUTION

Selecting [AV INPUT] as the source

Selecting [EXT 1] or [EXT 2] as
the source
% Touch the source icon and touch [EXT 1]
or [EXT 2].
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 97

Screen configuration
1

3 2

1 [AV Input] is set to [Video].
= For details, refer to Setting the video input
on page 150
2 Touch the source icon and touch
[AV INPUT].
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 97

Operating the External Unit
The term “external unit” refers to future
Pioneer devices that are not currently planned
for, or devices that allow control of basic functions although they are not fully controlled by
the navigation system. Two external units can
be controlled by this navigation system. When
two external units are connected, the navigation system allocates them to external unit 1
or external unit 2.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
external unit’s operation manual. This section
provides information on external unit operations with the navigation system that differ
from those described in the external unit’s operation manual.
p Operation varies depending on the external
unit connected. (In some cases, the external unit may not respond.)

1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 External unit indicator
Displays any connected external units.
3 Auto/Manual mode indicator
Shows the current mode.
= For details, refer to Switching the automatic
and manual function on the next page

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)

For safety reasons, visual images cannot be
viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view visual images, you must stop in a safe place and
put on the parking brake before setting your route
(For details, refer to To ensure safe driving on page
22).

Touch panel key operation
% Touch the source icon and then touch
[EXT 1] or [EXT 2] to select the external
unit.
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
Touch panel keys

1
4

1 Send an a, b, c, or d command
Touch to operate the external unit.

139

Chapter

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)

p Operation varies depending on the external unit connected. (In some cases,
some functions may not be used until
you touch and hold the key.)
2 Send a band command
Touch to send a band command to the external unit.
p Operation varies depending on the external unit connected. (In some cases, the
external unit may not respond.)
3 Send a 1 key to 6 key command
= For details, refer to Operate the external
unit by using 1 key — 6 key on this page
4 Operate the external unit by using
Function 1 to Function 4 key and
Auto/Manual key
= For details, refer to Operate the external
unit by using Function 1 — Function 4 on
this page
= For details, refer to Switching the automatic and manual function on this page

Operate the external unit by
using Function 1 — Function 4
The external unit can be operated by transmitting the operating commands set to
Function 1 — Function 4.
p The operating commands set to Function 1
— Function 4 vary depending on the external unit.
1

Touch [Function].

Touch [Function 1, 2, 3 or 4].

The operation command is transmitted to the
external unit.
p Some functions may not be used until you
touch and hold the key.
p To return to the previous screen, touch
[Back].

Operate the external unit by
using 1 key — 6 key
The external unit can be operated by transmitting the operating commands set to 1 key — 6
key.
1

Touch [1] — [6].

2 Touch desired key to operate the external unit.

Switching the automatic and
manual function
You can turn automatic and manual function
on or off.
You can switch between Auto and Manual
functions of the external unit connected.
Initially, this function is set to Auto.
p Operating commands set for Auto and
Manual operations vary depending on the
external unit connected.
1

p To return to the previous screen, touch
[Back].
p Operation varies depending on the external
unit connected. (In some cases, some functions may not be used until you touch and
hold the key.)

140

Touch [Function].

2 Touch [Auto/Manual].
Touching [Auto/Manual] switches between
[Auto] and [Manual].
p Operation varies depending on the external
unit connected. (In some cases, the external unit may not respond.)
p To return to the previous screen, touch
[Back].

Chapter

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)

Operating the AUX input
source (AUX)

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)

An IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as CDRB20/CD-RB10 (sold separately) lets you connect your navigation system to auxiliary equipment featuring RCA output. For more details,
refer to the IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector owner’s manual.

Selecting [AUX] as the source
1 [AUX Input] is set to [On].
= For details, refer to Switching the auxiliary
setting on page 150
2 Touch the source icon and touch [AUX].
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 97

141

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual
Various settings are available with the audio
source according to your audiovisual needs.
This chapter describes the methods of changing the various settings and setting the LCD
panel.

2 Touch [AV Settings].
The AV Settings screen appears.
3

Touch the item you want to change.

Change Setting.

AV Setting Overview
The audio visual setting is divided into
[Audio Settings] and [System Settings].
Audio Settings screen

(E.g. Equalizer screen)

System Settings screen

p Touch [ESC] to return to the selected source
screen currently.
p Touch [Back] to return to the AV Settings
screen.

= For more details about “[Audio Settings]”,
refer to this page to page 146.
= For more details about “[System Settings]”,
refer to page 146 to page 152.
p When Preout (the subwoofer controller setting in System Settings menu) is Full, the
Non Fading will be displayed instead of
Sub Woofer.
= For details, refer to Setting the rear output
and subwoofer controller on page 152
When selecting the FM tuner as the source,
you cannot select [Source Level].

How to Operate the Audio
Settings screen
1 Press AV button.
The Navigation screen changes to the Audio
source screen (of any source).

142

Customizing the Audio
Settings Items
Using the equalizer
The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization
to match vehicle interior acoustic characteristics as desired.

Recalling equalizer curves
There are six stored equalizer curves which
you can easily recall. Here is a list of the equalizer curves:
Equalizer curve
Super Bass
Super Bass is a curve in which only low-range is
boosted.
Powerful (Default)
Powerful is a curve in which low-range and highrange sounds are boosted.

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual
Natural
Natural is a curve in which low-range and high-range
sounds are slightly boosted.
Vocal
Vocal is a curve in which the mid-range sounds, such
as the human vocal range, are boosted.
Flat
Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.

when Custom2 curve is selected, the
Custom2 curve will be updated.
p The adjusted Custom1 curve is memorized
for each of the source selected, but one
curve is shared for the following sources.
! AM and FM
! EXT 1 and EXT 2
! AUX and AV INPUT
In the built-in DVD drive, different curves
can be memorized for a DVD-Video and a
CD (CD-DA or MP3).
You can adjust the center frequency, level
and the Q (curve characteristics) of each
band (Low/Mid/High).

Custom2
Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you create. If you select this curve, the effect is reflected all
audio source.

1 Touch [Equalizer] in Audio Settings
menu.
2

Touch desired equalizer.

p When Flat is selected, no supplement or
correction is made to the sound. This is
useful to check the effect of the equalizer
curves by switching alternatively between
Flat and a set equalizer curve.

! Band:
You can select the band you want to adjust.
! Frequency:
You can select which frequency to be
set as the center frequency.
! Level:
You can adjust the decibel (dB) level of
the selected band.
! Q:
You can select the details of the curve
characteristics. (The following figure
shows the characteristic image.)

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

Custom1
Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you create. A separate custom curve can be created. Custom1 and Custom2 are adjusted equalizer curves that
you create. Adjustments can be made with a 3-band
parametric equalizer.

Adjusting equalizer curves
You can adjust the currently selected equalizer
curve setting as desired.
! A separate Custom1 curve can be created
for each source. If you make adjustments
when a curve Super Bass, Powerful,
Natural, Vocal, Flat, or Custom1 is selected, the equalizer curve settings will be
memorized in Custom1.
! A Custom2 curve can be created common
to all sources. If you make adjustments

1 Touch [Equalizer] in Audio Settings
menu.
2 Touch [Customize].
The details setting screen appears.
En

143

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

3 Touch c or d to select the equalizer
band to adjust.
Each time you touch c or d selects equalizer
bands in the following order:
Low — Mid — High
4 Touch c or d to select the desired center frequency.
Low: 40 — 80 — 100 — 160 (Hz)
Mid: 200 — 500 — 1K — 2K (Hz)
High: 3.15K — 8K — 10K — 12.5K (Hz)
5 Touch c or d to adjust the level of the
equalizer band.
Each time you touch c or d increases or decreases the level of the equalization band.
+12dB to –12dB is displayed as the level is increased or decreased.

p When you set staging to an option other
than [Off], the high pass filter (HPF) setting
turns [Off].

= For details, refer to Using the high pass filter
on page 146

Adjusting a position effect
You can select a listener position that you
want to make as the center of sound effects.
1 Touch [Staging] in Audio Settings
menu.
2

Touch [Position].

Touch desired position.

6 Touch c or d to select the desired [Q].
Touch c or d until the desired the curve characteristics appears in the display.
Wide2 — Wide1 — Narrow1 — Narrow2
p To adjust other bands, repeat step 3 to step
6.

Using balance adjustment
Setting the simulated sound stage
You can select the desired effect from various
simulated sound stages, such as Music Studio
or Dynamic Theater. You can also adjust a listener positioning effect.

Setting a stage that fits your image
1 Touch [Staging] in Audio Settings
menu.
2

Touch desired stage setting.

You can select a fader/balance setting that
provides an ideal listening environment in all
occupied seats.
1 Touch [FAD/BAL] in Audio Settings
menu.
The FAD/BAL screen appears. When Rear SP
(the subwoofer controller setting in
System Settings menu) is Sub.W, Balance
will be displayed instead of FAD/BAL.
= For details, refer to Setting the rear output
and subwoofer controller on page 152
2 Touch a or b to adjust front/rear
speaker balance.
Each time you touch a or b moves the front/
rear speaker balance towards the front or the
rear.

p [Living Room] setting that emphasizes
mid-range sound hardly has any effect near
the maximum volume level.

144

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

4 Touch c or d to select cut-off frequency.
Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off frequencies in the following order:
50 — 80 — 125 (Hz)
Only frequencies lower than those in the selected range are output from the subwoofer.

3 Touch c or d to adjust left/right speaker balance.
Each time you touch c or d moves the left/
right speaker balance towards the left or the
right.
Left: 9 to Right: 9 is displayed as the left/right
speaker balance moves from left to right.

Using subwoofer output
This navigation system is equipped with a subwoofer output which can be turned on or off.
p When the subwoofer output is on, you can
adjust the cut-off frequency, the output
level, and the phase of the subwoofer.
1 Touch [Sub Woofer] in Audio Settings
menu.
When Preout (the subwoofer controller setting in System Settings menu) is Full, you
cannot select [Sub Woofer].
= For details, refer to Setting the rear output
and subwoofer controller on page 152
2 Touch [On] to turn subwoofer output
on.
To turn subwoofer output off, touch [Off].
3 Touch [Reverse] or [Normal] to select
the phase of subwoofer output.
p If subwoofer output sound is not clear with
[Normal], change it to [Reverse].

5 Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the output
level of the subwoofer.
+6 to -6 is displayed as the level is increased
or decreased.

Using non fading output
When the non fading output setting is on, the
audio signal does not pass through navigation
system’s low pass filter (for the subwoofer),
but is output through the RCA output.
1 Touch [Non Fading] in Audio Settings
menu.
Only when Preout (the subwoofer controller
setting in System Settings menu) is Full, you
can select [Non Fading].
= For details, refer to Setting the rear output
and subwoofer controller on page 152
2 Touch [On] to turn non fading output
on.
To turn non fading output off, touch [Off].
3 Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the output
level of the non fading.
+6 to -6 is displayed as the level is increased
or decreased.

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

Front: 15 to Rear: 15 is displayed as the front/
rear speaker balance moves from front to rear.
When the rear output setting is Rear SP
Sub.W, you cannot adjust front/rear speaker
balance.
= For details, refer to Setting the rear output
and subwoofer controller on page 152

Adjusting loudness
Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the
low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.
1 Touch [Loudness] in Audio Settings
menu.
2 Touch [On] to turn loudness on.
To turn loudness off, touch [Off].

145

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

3 Touch c or d to select a desired level.
Each time you touch c or d selects level in
the following order:
Low — Mid — High

Using the high pass filter
When you do not want low sounds from the
subwoofer output frequency range to play
from the front or rear speakers, turn HPF (high
pass filter) on. Only frequencies higher than
those in the selected range are output from
the front or rear speakers.
1

Touch [HPF] in Audio Settings menu.

2 Touch [On] to turn high pass filter on.
To turn high pass filter off, touch [Off].
3 Touch c or d to select cut-off frequency.
Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off frequencies in the following order:
50 — 80 — 125 (Hz)
When Preout (the subwoofer controller setting in System Settings menu) is Sub.W, HPF
function is effective for front speakers only.
If you change the acoustic field after you set it
once, the high pass filter (HPF) setting turns Off.

3 Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the source volume.
+8 to -8 is displayed as the source volume is
increased or decreased.
Sources are set to same source level adjustment volume automatically.
!
!
!
!

CD and ROM (MP3)
XM and SIRIUS
EXT 1 and EXT 2
AUX and AV INPUT

Customizing the System
Settings Items
System Settings lets you perform system set
up of different settings for navigation system.

How to view and operate the
System Settings
1 Press AV button.
The Navigation screen changes to the Audio
source screen (of any source).
2 Touch [AV Settings].
The AV Settings screen appears.
3

Touch [System Settings].

Adjusting source levels
Source Level (source level adjustment) lets
you adjust the volume level of each source to
prevent radical changes in volume when
switching between sources.
p Settings are based on the FM tuner volume
level, which remains unchanged.
1 Compare the FM tuner volume level
with the level of the source you wish to adjust.
2 Touch [Source Level] in Audio Settings
menu.

146

4 Touch the item you want to change.
The setting change screen appears, or the setting changes by toggling it.

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual
p Touch
or
next or previous page.

to move to the

Change Setting.

Setting up the built-in DVD drive
You can change the preference for playing a
DVD on the built-in DVD drive.
You can use this menu to change audio, subtitle, parental lock, and other DVD settings.
Some changes or settings which you have set
here may be invalid depending on the features
of the DVD disc. For details, see the disc’s instructions.
p You can enter this menu while [DVD] is selected as audio source.
p If you can enter this menu during DVD
playback, playback will be stopped and return to the first chapter.

Setting the language
You can set each desired language for subtitle,
audio and menu. If the selected language is
recorded on the DVD, subtitles, audio, and
menu are displayed in that language.
1

Switch the audio source to [DVD].

2 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in
System Settings menu.
3 Touch [Subtitle Language],
[Audio Language] or [Menu Language].
Each language menu is displayed and the currently set language is selected.

4 Touch the desired language.
When you select [Others], a language code
input display is shown. Input the four digit
code of the desired language then touch
[Enter].
= For details, refer to Language Code Chart for
DVD on page 155
p If the selected language is not recorded on
the disc, the default language specified on
the disc is output and displayed.
p You can also switch the subtitle and audio
language by touching [Subtitle] or [Audio]
during playback.

= For more details about “Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle)”,
refer to Touch panel key operation on page 105
= For more details about “Changing audio
language during playback (Multi-audio)”, refer
to Touch panel key operation on page 105

Setting assist subtitles on or off
Assist subtitles offer explanations for the aurally impaired. However, they are only displayed if they are recorded on the DVD.
You can turn assist subtitles on or off as desired.
1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in
System Settings menu.
2 Touch [Assist Subtitle].
Touching [Assist Subtitle] switches between
[On] and [Off].

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

p Touch [ESC] to return to the selected source
screen.
p To return to the previous screen, touch
[Back].

Setting angle icon display
You can set to display the angle icon
on
scenes where the angle can be switched.
1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in
System Settings menu.
2 Touch [Multi Angle].
Touching [Multi Angle] switches between
[On] and [Off].

147

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual
Setting the aspect ratio

Setting the code number and level

There are two kinds of display. A wide screen
display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect)
of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect
of 4:3. If you use a regular rear display has a
TV aspect of 4:3, you can set the aspect ratio
suitable for your rear display. (We recommend
use this function only when you want to fit it to
rear display.)
p When using a regular display, select either
Letter Box or Panscan. Selecting 16:9 may
result in an unnatural picture.

When you first use this function, register your
code number. If you do not register a code
number, parental lock will not operate.

1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in
System Settings menu.
2 Touch [TV Aspect].
Each touch of [TV Aspect] changes the settings as follows:
! 16:9 — Wide screen picture (16:9) is displayed as it is (initial setting)
! Letter Box — The picture is in the shape of
a letter box with black bands at the top and
bottom of the screen
! Panscan — The picture is cut short at the
right and left of the screen
p When playing discs that do not have a panscan system, the disc is played back with
[Letter Box] even if you select [Panscan]
setting. Confirm whether the disc package
bears the 16 : 9 LB mark.

Setting the parental lock
Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental
lock to set restrictions so that children cannot
watch a violent and adult oriented scenes. You
can set the parental lock level in steps as desired.
p When you set a parental lock level and then
play a disc featuring parental lock, code
number input indications may be displayed. In this case, playback will begin
when the correct code number is input.

148

1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in
System Settings menu.
2

Touch [Parental Level].

3 Touch [0] — [9] to input a four digit
code number.
4 While the input number is displayed,
touch [Enter].
The code number is registered, and you can
now set the level.
5 Touch any of [1] — [8] to select the desired level.
The parental lock level is set.
! Level 8 — Playback of the entire disc is
possible (initial setting)
! Level 7 — Level 2 — Playback of discs for
children and non-adult oriented discs is
possible
! Level 1 — Only playback of discs for children is possible
p If you want to change the parental level,
enter the registered code number.
Proceed to Step 3.
p We recommend that you keep a record of
your code number in case you forget it.
p The parental lock level is recorded on the
disc. You can confirm it by looking at the
disc package, the included literature or the
disc itself. With discs that do not feature a
recorded parental lock level, you cannot
use parental lock.
p With some discs, parental lock operates to
skip certain scenes only, after which normal
playback resumes. For details, refer to the
disc’s instructions.
p If you forget the registered code number,
touch [Clear] 10 times on the screen in the
Step 3. The registered code number is canceled, letting you register a new one.

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual
Changing the wide screen mode
CAUTION
For safety reasons, these functions are not available while your vehicle is in motion. To enable
these functions, you must stop in a safe place
and put on the parking brake before setting your
route (Refer to To ensure safe driving on page 22).

p Different settings can be memorized for
each video source.
p When video is viewed in a wide screen
mode that does not match its original aspect ratio, it may appear differently.
p Remember that use of this system for commercial or public viewing purposes may

constitute an infringement on the author’s
rights protected by the Copyright Law.
p Video may appear grainy when viewed in
Cinema or Zoom mode.
p The navigation map and the rear view camera picture is always Full.

Setting for rear view camera
The following two functions are available. The
rear view camera feature requires a separately
sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC2). (For details, consult your dealer.)
Camera for backing up
The navigation system features a function that
automatically switches to the full-screen rear
camera image installed on your vehicle. When
the shift lever is in the REVERSE (R) position,
the screen automatically switches to fullscreen rear view camera.
Camera for Rear view mode
[Rear View] can be displayed at all times (e.g.
when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as a
split screen where map information is partially
displayed. Please be aware that in this setting,
camera image is not resized to fit, and that a
portion of what is seen by the camera is not
viewable.

CAUTION
Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which
outputs mirror reversed images, otherwise screen
image may appear reversed.

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

% Touch [Wide Mode] in System Settings
menu.
The Wide Mode screen appears.
On the Wide Mode screen, you can select the
following items:
Full, Just, Cinema, Zoom, or Normal
Normal (normal)
A 4:3 picture is displayed normally, giving you
no sense of disparity since its proportions are
the same as that of the normal picture.
Full (full)
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direction only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 TV picture (normal picture) without any omissions.
Just (just)
The picture is enlarged slightly at the center
and the amount of enlargement increases horizontally toward the ends of the picture, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture without
sensing any disparity even on a wide screen.
Cinema (cinema)
A picture is enlarged by the same proportion
as Full or Zoom in the horizontal direction
and by an intermediate proportion between
Full and Zoom in the vertical direction; ideal
for a cinema-sized picture (wide screen picture) where captions lie outside the frame.
Zoom (zoom)
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same proportion both vertically and horizontally; ideal for a
cinema-sized picture (wide screen picture).

p Immediately confirm whether the display
changes to a rear view camera image when
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE (R)
from another position.
p When the screen changes to full-screen
rear view camera image during normal
driving, switch to the opposite setting in
[Polarity].
p Initially, this function is set to [Off].
1 Touch [Camera Input] in
System Settings menu.

149

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual
2 Touch [On] to turn rear view camera
setting on.
p Unless this setting is [On], you cannot
switch to Rear View mode.

3 Touch [Polarity] to select an appropriate
setting for polarity.
Each time you touch [Polarity] switches between the following polarity:
! Battery — When the polarity of the connected lead is positive while the shift lever
is in the REVERSE (R) position
! GND — When the polarity of the connected
lead is negative while the shift lever is in
the REVERSE (R) position

Setting the video input
You can switch the setting according to the
connected component.
p Select [Video] to watch video of a connected component as AV INPUT source.
% Touch [AV Input] in System Settings
menu.
Each touch of [AV Input] changes the settings as follows:
! Off — No video component is connected
! Video — External video component
! EXT — Pioneer external unit connected
with an RCA video cable
p When a Pioneer external unit is connected
with an IP-BUS cable, select [EXT]. When
the audio source is [EXT], the “Video
image” of the Pioneer external unit can be
displayed.

Switching the auxiliary setting
It is possible to use auxiliary equipment with
the navigation system as the one of sources.
Activate the auxiliary setting when using auxiliary equipment connected to the navigation
system.
% Touch [AUX Input] in System Settings
menu.
Touching [AUX Input] switches between [On]
and [Off].

150

= For details, refer to Selecting [AUX] as the
source on page 141

Switching the muting/
attenuation timing
You can mute the audio source volume or attenuate the output signal. This setting is invalid for the mute signal has been received from
the MUTE lead connected to the navigation
unit. (Even if this setting is [Off], the navigation system will mute or attenuate the audio
source volume when the signal is output via
MUTE lead.)
% Touch [Mute Set] in System Settings
menu.
Each touch of [Mute Set] changes the settings as follows:
! Guide/Tel/VR — The volume is muted or attenuated according to the following conditions
— When the navigation outputs the guidance voice.
— When you use a cellular phone via Bluetooth technology (dialing, talking, incoming call).
— When the voice recognition mode is activated.
! Tel/VR — The volume is muted or attenuated according to the following conditions
— When you use a cellular phone via Bluetooth technology (dialing, talking, incoming call).
— When the voice recognition mode is activated.
! Off — The volume does not change
p Operation returns to normal when the correspond action is ended.
p The navigation voice guidance itself cannot
be attenuated or muted. If you want to mute
the navigation guidance voice temporarily,
on the navigation map screen.
use

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual
Switching the muting/
attenuation level

% Touch [Mute Level] in System Settings
menu.
Each touch of [Mute Level] changes the settings as follows:
All — The volume becomes 0
–20dB — The volume becomes 1/10
–10dB — The volume becomes 1/3
When you select [All], [Mute] is displayed
and no audio adjustments are possible during the sound is turned off.
p When you select [–20dB] or [–10dB], no
audio adjustments, except volume control,
are possible during the sound is attenuated.
p Operation returns to normal when the correspond action is ended.
p Even when a mute signal has been received
from MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit, navigation voice guidance cannot
be attenuated or muted. If you want to mute
the navigation guidance voice temporarily,
on the navigation map screen.
use
!
!
!
p

Changing the voice output of
the navigation guidance
You can set the speaker to output the navigation guidance and phone voice, etc.
% Touch [Guide/Tel SP] in System Settings
menu.
Each touch of [Guide/Tel SP] changes the settings as follows:

! L+R SP — Uses both the front right and left
speakers

Switching the auto antenna
setting
If the blue lead of the navigation system is
connected to the antenna control terminal of
the vehicle, select either of the following settings.
! Radio — The antenna extends or turns on
only when the audio source is FM or AM.
The antenna is stored or turned off when
the source is switched to another.
! Power — The antenna extends or turns on
when the ignition switch is turns on. The
antenna is stored or turned off when the
ignition switch is turned off.
% Touch [Auto ANT] in System Settings
menu.
Touching [Auto ANT] switches between
[Radio] and [Power].
p Regardless of whether [Radio] or [Power]
is selected, turning off the ignition switch
will cause the antenna to automatically retract or turn off.

Setting the clock display on the
video image
You can select whether to display the clock on
the video image screen without touch panel
keys, such as DVD-Video, AV INPUT, or TV
tuner.

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

You can select the muting/attenuation level of
[Mute Set]. This setting is also effective for a
mute signal that has been received from the
MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit.
p This menu is not available in the following
cases:
— Audio source is [OFF]
— During muting/attenuation
— [5.1Ch Setup] is [On]

% Touch [Clock DISP] in System Settings
menu.
Touching [Clock DISP] switches between
[All SCRN] and [Audio SCRN].
! All SCRN — The clock is overlaid on the
“Video image”
! Audio SCRN — The clock is not overlaid on
the “Video image”

! Left SP — Uses only the front left speaker
! Right SP — Uses only the front right speaker
En

151

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual
Setting the CD recording mode
You can set whether to start recording tracks
automatically when you play a CD, or to manually trigger recording.
% Touch [REC Mode] in System Settings
menu.
Each touch of [REC Mode] changes the settings as follows:
! Auto — Records the tracks automatically
when a CD is played
! Manual — Lets you select the tracks you
want to record manually, and records them
! Single — Automatically records only the
first track of the CD

Setting the rear output and
subwoofer controller
The navigation system’s rear output can be
used for full-range speaker or subwoofer connection. If you switch Rear SP setting to
Sub.W, you can connect a rear speaker lead
directly to a subwoofer without using an auxiliary amp.
Initially, the navigation system is set for rear
fullrange speaker connection. When rear output is connected to full-range speakers (when
Rear SP setting is Full), you can connect the
RCA subwoofer output (SUBWOOFER OUTPUT or NON-FADING OUTPUT) to a subwoofer.
In this case, you can select whether to use the
subwoofer controller’s (low pass filter, phase)
built-in amp of the navigation system or the
auxiliary amp or subwoofer.
p If you change the subwoofer controller
[Rear SP] or [Preout], [Sub Woofer] or
[Non Fading] in Audio Settings menu return to the factory settings.
p Both rear speaker leads output and RCA
rear output are switched simultaneously in
this setting.
p Rear SP can be set only when the source is
[OFF].
1 Touch [Rear SP] in System Settings
menu.

152

2 Touch [Full] or [Sub.W] to switch the
rear output setting.
p When no subwoofer is connected to the
rear output, select Full. When a subwoofer
is connected to the rear speaker leads directly, select Sub.W.

3 Touch [Preout] to switch the subwoofer
output or non fading output.
p When [Rear SP] setting is Sub.W, [Preout]
is invalid.
p Even if you change this setting, there is no
output unless you turn [Non Fading] or
[Sub Woofer] in Audio Settings menu
[On].

= For details, refer to Using non fading output
on page 145
= For details, refer to Using subwoofer output
on page 145

Switching the 5.1ch setting
When the navigation system is combined with
the multi-channel processor system (sold separately), you can use the multi-channel
sound.
Enter the following setting when combining
the multi-channel processor system.

CAUTION
DO NOT enter this setting before you connect the
multi-channel processor system. (If this setting is
entered, the RCA (“SUBWOOFER OUTPUT or
NON-FADING OUTPUT”) will output maximum volume for the multi-channel processor system.)
Pioneer is not responsible for any damage to the
speaker equipment caused by ignoring this warning.

p This setting is possible only when the optical cable connection box (supplied with the
Multi-channel processor) is connected to
the navigation system.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
[OFF] to turn source off.
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual
2 Touch [5.1Ch Setup] in the System Settings menu.
If you touch [5.1Ch Setup], it will be turned
[On]. If you touch [5.1Ch Setup] again to turn
[Off] the setting, [5.1Ch Setup] will disappear.
If you want to turn it [On] again, you have to
repeat the procedure from the Step1.

Selecting the video for “Rear
display”
You can choose either to show the same
image as the front screen or to show the selected source on the “Rear display”.
1 Press AV button to switch Audio operation screen.
2 Touch the source icon and then touch
[REAR SCREEN].

— All sounds cannot be output for “Rear
display”.
— There is no picture on “Rear display”
while [Picture Adjust] for
[Back-Camera] is carried out.
— The map screen navigation images output to the “Rear display” differ from
standard NTSC format images. Therefore, their quality will be inferior to the
images that appear on the front screen.
p When DVD is selected, the following restrictions are applied to “Rear display”.
— When a CD or MP3 disc is set in the
built-in DVD drive, nothing is output.
p When AV is selected, the following restrictions are applied to “Rear display”.
— The “Video image” and sound are output
only when AV INPUT has both video and
sound.
— The “Video image” and sound are output
only when the appropriate setting on
[AV Input] is [Video].

Operating the picture adjustment
CAUTION

Each touch of [REAR SCREEN] changes the
settings as follows:
! MIRROR — The video on the front screen of
the navigation unit is output to the “Rear
display”
! DVD — The video and sound of the DVDs
are output to the “Rear display”
! AV — The video and sound of AV INPUT
are output to the “Rear display”
p When MIRROR is selected, the following restrictions are applied to “Rear display”.
— When the TV tuner is connected with
AV-BUS, its “Video image” cannot be
output. (Connect the TV tuner’s rear output to “Rear display” directly.)
— When selecting [Rear View] in the map
display, nothing is displayed.

For safety reasons, these functions are not available while your vehicle is in motion. To enable
these functions, you must stop in a safe place
and put on the parking brake before setting your
route (Refer to To ensure safe driving on page 22).

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

Other Functions

You can adjust the picture for each source and
rear view camera.
1 Press V button to display Picture Adjust
screen.

! Brightness — Adjusts the black intensity
! Contrast — Adjusts the contrast
! Color — Adjusts the color saturation

153

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual
! Hue — Adjusts the tone of color (red is emphasized or green is emphasized)
! Dimmer — Adjusts the brightness of display
! [Back-Camera] — Shows the picture adjustment display for the rear view camera
p Touching [Source] while adjusting the rear
view camera image returns you to the previous screen.
p The adjustments of Brightness, Contrast
and Dimmer are stored separately when
your vehicle’s headlights are off (daytime)
and when your vehicle’s headlights are on
(nighttime). These are switched automatically depending on the vehicle’s headlights
are on or off.
p You cannot adjust Color and Hue for the
source without a video and navigation map
display.
p The setting contents can be memorized separately for the following screen and the
“Video image”.
— AM/FM/M-CD/iPod/AUX/XM/SIRIUS
screen
— LIBRARY (Music Library) screen
— Built-in DVD drive
— TV image
— AV INPUT and EXT 1, EXT 2
— Rear view camera image
— Navigation map and menu screen
p The picture adjustment may not be available with some rear view cameras.
p Because of the LCD screen characteristics,
you may not be able to adjust the screen at
low temperatures.

2 Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the desired
item.
Each time you touch [+] or [-] increases or decreases the level of the desired item.
3 Touch [ESC] to return to the previous
screen.

154

Switching the backlight on or off
By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen,
you can turn off the screen display and the
voice guidance.
% Press and hold V button.
The backlight turns off, and the screen turns
off.
p Press V button once again to turn on the
backlight, and the screen is displayed.

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

Language Code Chart for DVD
Language (code), input code
Guarani (gn), 0714
Gujarati (gu), 0721
Hausa (ha), 0801
Hindi (hi), 0809
Croatian (hr), 0818
Hungarian (hu), 0821
Armenian (hy), 0825
Interlingua (ia), 0901
Interlingue (ie), 0905
Inupiak (ik), 0911
Indonesian (in), 0914
Icelandic (is), 0919
Hebrew (iw), 0923
Yiddish (ji), 1009
Javanese (jw), 1023
Georgian (ka), 1101
Kazakh (kk), 1111
Greenlandic (kl), 1112
Cambodian (km), 1113
Kannada (kn), 1114
Kashmiri (ks), 1119
Kurdish (ku), 1121
Kirghiz (ky), 1125
Latin (la), 1201
Lingala (ln), 1214
Laotian (lo), 1215
Lithusnian (lt), 1220
Latvian, Lettish (lv), 1222
Malagasy (mg), 1307
Maori (mi), 1309
Macedonian (mk), 1311
Malayalam (ml), 1312
Mongolian (mn), 1314
Moldavian (mo), 1315
Marathi (mr), 1318
Malay (ms), 1319
Maltese (mt), 1320
Burmese (my), 1325
Nauru (na), 1401
Nepali (ne), 1405
Norwegian (no), 1415
Occitan (oc), 1503
Oromo (om), 1513
Oriya (or), 1518
Panjabi (pa), 1601
Polish (pl), 1612

Language (code), input code
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619
Quechua (qu), 1721
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813
Kirundi (rn), 1814
Rumanian (ro), 1815
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Sindhi (sd), 1904
Sango (sg), 1907
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Shinghalese (si), 1909
Slovak (sk), 1911
Slovenian (sl), 1912
Samoan (sm), 1913
Shona (sn), 1914
Somali (so), 1915
Albanian (sq), 1917
Serbian (sr), 1918
Siswati (ss), 1919
Sesotho (st), 1920
Sundanese (su), 1921
Swahili (sw), 1923
Tamil (ta), 2001
Telugu (te), 2005
Tajik (tg), 2007
Thai (th), 2008
Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Turkmen (tk), 2011
Tagalog (tl), 2012
Setswana (tn), 2014
Tongan (to), 2015
Turkish (tr), 2018
Tsonga (ts), 2019
Tatar (tt), 2020
Twi (tw), 2023
Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Urdu (ur), 2118
Uzbek (uz), 2126
Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Volapuük (vo), 2215
Wolof (wo), 2315
Xhosa (xh), 2408
Yoruba (yo), 2515
Zulu (zu), 2621

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

Language (code), input code
Japanese (ja), 1001
English (en), 0514
French (fr), 0618
Spanish (es), 0519
German (de), 0405
Italian (it), 0920
Chinese (zh), 2608
Dutch (nl), 1412
Portuguese (pt), 1620
Swedish (sv), 1922
Russian (ru), 1821
Korean (ko), 1115
Greek (el), 0512
Afar (aa), 0101
Abkhazian (ab), 0102
Afrikaans (af), 0106
Amharic (am), 0113
Arabic (ar), 0118
Assamese (as), 0119
Aymara (ay), 0125
Azerbaijani (az), 0126
Bashkir (ba), 0201
Belorussian (be), 0205
Bulgarian (bg), 0207
Bihari (bh), 0208
Bislama (bi), 0209
Bengali, Bangla (bn), 0214
Tibetan (bo), 0215
Breton (br), 0218
Catalan (ca), 0301
Corsican (co), 0315
Czach (cs), 0319
Welsh (cy), 0325
Danish (da), 0401
Bhutani (dz), 0426
Esperanto (eo), 0515
Estonian (et), 0520
Basque (eu), 0521
Persian (fa), 0601
Finnish (fi), 0609
Fiji (fj), 0610
Faroese (fo), 0615
Frisian (fy), 0625
Irish (ga), 0701
Scottish Gaelic (gd), 0704
Galician (gl), 0712

155

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
To Ensure Safe Driving
CAUTION
For safety reasons, Voice Help menu (Voice Recog.Help) is not available while your vehicle is in
motion. To enable this function, you must stop in
a safe place and put on the parking brake before
setting your route.
Depending on the selected languages, the
commands that you registered before may not
be available.
= For details, refer to Available Voice Commands on page 159

Basics of Voice Operation
Your Pioneer navigation system uses the latest
in voice recognition technology. You can use
voice commands to operate many of its functions. This chapter describes where you can
use voice commands, and also what commands the system accepts.

3 When the command is recognized, the
navigation system displays the response
message on the screen, and pronounces it
in some cases.

As necessary, repeat Step 3.

5 The requested operation will be carried
out.
p The voice operation may not be operable for a
minute after the navigation system has booted
up.
p If you operate using “CD-SR1” Steering Remote Control (sold separately), the following
buttons can be used for operation:
VR ACTIVATION / OFF HOOK button:
Same function as VOICE icon.
VR CANCEL / ON HOOK button:
Return to previous screen.

To start voice operation
Flow of voice operation
You can start voice operation any time even
when the map screen is displayed or audio is
operated. (Some operations are not available.)
The basic steps of voice operation are as follows.

No sounds can be output during

% Touch VOICE icon.
Navigation screen

1 Touch VOICE icon to activate voice operation.

2 Speak a command into the microphone
after the beep.

156

Audio screen

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
p Depending on the operating state of the navigation system, some commands displayed in Voice Help may be unavailable.
Available commands are in white and unavailable commands are in gray.

When using voice operation for the
first time

Voice Help menu

VOICE icon

!
When voice command is possible
!
When voice command is not accepted
p When you say “Voice Help”, the navigation
system pronounces the displayed words
that can be vocalized.
p If no voice icon is displayed, check to see
whether the microphone is properly connected and turn the power on again.
p If there are multiple pages, the voice help
menu can be switched by using
or
on the screen. You can also switch
the page by saying “Next page” or “Previous page”.
p If you say “Back” or touch [Back], the
screen returns to the previous screen.

To cancel voice operation

p If no command is made in the next 6 seconds or the recognition fails three times
successively, the voice recognition
switches to standby mode. To reactivate
voice operation, touch VOICE icon.

Tips for Voice Operation
For your voice commands to be correctly recognized and interpreted, ensure that conditions are suitable for recognition.
Reduce the volume setting on your
vehicle audio system
= For details, refer to Switching the muting/attenuation timing on page 150
Close the vehicle windows
Please note that wind through the vehicle window or miscellaneous noise from outside the
vehicle can interfere with voice operation.
Position the microphone carefully
For optimum pick-up, the microphone should
be fixed at a suitable distance directly in front
of the driver.
Pause before giving a command
Speaking too soon may cause the recognition
to fail.
Pronounce your commands carefully
Speak slowly, deliberately, and clearly.
p If the registered voice command and the
default voice command is the same, the registered voice command (e.g. the pronunciation for the entry in “Address Book” and
the playlist in Music library ) will take priority. In this case, the default voice command
will not function. To use the default voice
command, change or delete the registered
voice command that is identical to the default voice command.

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Until you are familiar with this system, it is recommended that you stop the vehicle in a safe
place and refer to the commands displayed in
the Voice Help menu (a list of the words you
can speak). When your vehicle is parked with
the parking brake on, see the Voice Help
menu and speak voice command on that
menu (except for some cases).

You can cancel voice operation features at any
time by saying “Cancel”. After you cancel
voice operation, the map is displayed.

157

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

An Example of Voice
Operation
Search for POI in vicinity
In this example, you want to search for the
nearest gas station and set it as your destination.
p Give the following verbal commands after
switching to the navigation screen.
= For details, refer to Voice commands related
to navigation on page 161

When you want to search the gas station nearest to the current location, say “Vicinity
Search”.
The message “Vicinity search. Please request POI category.” appears, and the navigation system pronounces that message.
5 Say “GAS Station”.
The message “Vicinity search. Gas Station”
appears.
The map of the nearest gas station is shown.

1 Press MAP button to display the navigation map screen.
2 Touch VOICE icon.
A list of commands for voice operation appears. After the message, the beep indicates
that the system is ready to accept your voice
command. Say a command after this beep.
3

Say “Destination”.

p For categories that can be used as the voice
commands, refer to “Category list for vicinity
search”.

= For details, refer to Category list for vicinity
search on page 172
6

Touch VOICE icon.

7 Say “Next” or “Previous” to select the
desired facilities.

A message to prompt the next operation is
given.
p If you say “Back” or touch [Back], the
screen returns to the previous screen.

4 Say “Vicinity Search”.
Say the corresponding commands for the
function you want to operate. Here, the selection method of your destination is specified.

158

8 After confirming the location, say “Set
As Destination”.
If there is no route, the system starts the route
calculation. If the route is already set, touch
VOICE icon to start route calculation.

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
Search for the playlist
In this example, you want to search for a playlist and play that playlist.
1 Touch VOICE icon when the audio
source is “LIBRARY”.
2

Say “Music Search”.

Say the desired group.

4 Say the name of the playlist you want
to play.

p If there are multiple pages, voice help menu
can be switched by using
or
on
the screen. You can also switch the page by
saying “Next page” or “Previous page”.
p You can also search the track in the current
playlist by saying “Track Search”.

Available Voice Commands
This section describes the flow and available
commands of each voice operation.
p When [Language] in [Regional Settings]
is changed to another language, the commands that you registered can be used
only if the language for voice operation is
the same.

p For , ,
shown on the following
chart, say the real name or number which
you want to search for. For example, if the
real city name is “Long Beach” and you
want to operate “Search by address,” say
“Long Beach” instead of .
p For shown on the following
chart, say the real POI name that you want
to search for. For example, if the real POI
name is “San Francisco International Airport” and you want to operate “Go to ,” say “Go to San Francisco International Airport” (or “Go to SFO”). You can vocalize included in the
following categories only.
— Railway Station, City Center, Airport,
Ferry Terminal, Airline Access, Golf
Courses, Shopping Center, Parks, and
Recreation Area
p For
shown on the following chart, say the registered pronunciation. For example, if the registered pronunciation in address book is
“My office” and you want to operate
“Search by entry on the address book”, say
“My office”. You can hear and edit the pronunciation.
= For details, refer to Changing a pronunciation on page 62
p For shown on the following chart, say
the registered pronunciation. For example,
if the registered pronunciation in phone
book is “My friend” and you want to operate
“Telephone Book”, say “My friend”. You can
hear and edit the pronunciation.
= For details, refer to Editing the entry in
“Phone Book” on page 84
p For , , shown on the
following chart, say the name in the music
library (if you edited their pronunciation,
say their pronunciation). You can hear and
edit the pronunciation.

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

p If the desired group is already selected, you
can skip this step.

159

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

p
p

160

= For details, refer to Changing the pronunciation of a playlist name or track name on
page 119
For and _{in “Vicinity Search”, refer to “Category list for vicinity search” and say the desired category in that list.
You can skip the commands with the mark
(*). For example, in case search by Point of
interest, the system can recognize the command even if you say “POI” without saying
“Destination”.
If some candidates have been found, the
candidate list appears. Select the one from
the list and proceed to next step.
During the voice operation, location screen
(A) or (B) may appear. In such a case, go to
“Location screen (A) and (B)” in the later
section, and continue the voice operation.
= For details, refer to Location screen (A)
and (B) on page 167
The voice operations related the telephone
are available only using hands-free phoning
feature of this system and is unavailable
during a call.
= For details, refer to Using Hands-free
Phoning on page 77
Terms written in italics are voice commands.

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Basic commands for voice operation
The following verbal commands can be used
both in navigation screen and audio operation
screen.
Basic commands
Back d Return the previous screen.
Cancel d Cancel the voice operation.
Current Location d Return the current location map screen.
Voice Help d Pronounces the display words that can be vocalized.
Next Page, Previous Page d Switch the page of Voice Help Menu.

Give the following verbal commands after
switching to the navigation screen.
Search by address
Destination* d Address d d d d Location Screen (A)
Notes:
! Select the state, province or territory manually before the voice operation.
! When you say the street name, say the street type together
! Some operation may be skipped depending on the address.
! If you don’t know the street name or house number, you can say “Area” so that your destination can be set to the
main point of that city or street.
Search by Points of interest
Destination* d POI d d Location Screen (A)
Destination* d POI d Go To d If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. If
there is no route, the system starts the route calculation.

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Voice commands related to navigation

Destination* d POI d Waypoint d Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.
Making phone call to POI
Destination* d POI d Call d Touch VOICE icon to call that facility (Only when the phone number is registered in the facility.)
Displaying the map of POI
Destination* d POI d Display d Display the map of that facility’s surroundings.
Search by telephone number
Destination* d Telephone Number d Say the telephone number you want to search. d Location Screen (A) (If multiple facilities exist with the same phone number, the facilities you intend may not be displayed.)
Note:
You can say 10 digits telephone number only. 911 and the number other than 10 digits is not available.

161

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
Search by entry on the address book
Destination* d Address Book* d d Location Screen (A)
Destination* d Go To d If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start
route calculation. If there is no route, the system starts the route calculation.
Destination* d Waypoint d Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.
Making phone call to entry on the address book
Destination* d Call d If the registered location has telephone number data,
touch VOICE icon to call the registered location.
Displaying the map of the entry on the address book
Destination* d Display d Display the map of surroundings on that facility.
Search the facilities in vicinity
Destination* d Vicinity Search d , _{d Location Screen (B)
Displaying the destination history
Destination* d Destination History d Display the Destination History screen.
Setting the route to your home
Destination* d Return Home d If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. (If there is no
route, the system starts the route calculation.)
Making phone call to your home
Destination* d Call Home d Touch VOICE icon to call your home (Only when the phone number is registered in your
home.)
Setting your home to waypoint
Destination* d Waypoint Home d Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. (This function is only available if you
have set the destination.)
Display the map of surroundings on your home
Destination* d Display Home d Display the map of surroundings on your home.
Display the map of surroundings on your destination
Destination* d Display Destination d Display the map of surroundings on your destination.
Set the map location as your destination
Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen. d Basic Operation* d Set As Destination d If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. If there is no route, the system starts the
route calculation.

162

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Set the map location as your waypoint
Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen. d Basic Operation* d Set As Waypoint
d Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.
Registering the map location to the address book
Basic Operation* d Registration d The system register that point and Information edit screen appears.
Operating the navigation map scale

Map Operation* d Change Scale* d XXXX mile(s) Scale <0.02miles Scale, 0.05miles Scale, 0.1miles Scale, 0.25miles
Scale, 0.5miles Scale, 0.75miles Scale, 1mile Scale, 2.5miles Scale, 5miles Scale, 10miles Scale, 25miles Scale, 50miles
Scale, 100miles Scale, 250miles Scale, 500miles Scale, 1000miles Scale> d Map screen will be changed to selected
scale.
Notes:
! These commands are available only when [km / mile] setting is [mile].
! This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode.
Map Operation* d Change Scale* d XXXX mile/yards Scale <25yards Scale, 50yards Scale, 100yards Scale, 0.25miles
Scale, 0.5miles Scale, 0.75miles Scale, 1mile Scale, 2.5miles Scale, 5miles Scale, 10miles Scale, 25miles Scale, 50miles
Scale, 100miles Scale, 250miles Scale, 500miles Scale, 1000miles Scale> d Map screen will be changed to selected
scale.
Notes:
! These commands are available only when [km / mile] setting is [Mile&Yard].
! This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode.
Map Operation* d Change Scale* d Zoom Out, Zoom In d Map screen will zoom out or zoom in.
Operating the view mode

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Map Operation* d Change Scale* d XXXX kilometer(s) Scale <25meters Scale, 50meters Scale, 100meters Scale, 200meters Scale, 500meters Scale, 1kilometer Scale, 2kilometers Scale, 5kilometers Scale, 10kilometers Scale, 20kilometers Scale,
50kilometers Scale, 100kilometers Scale, 200kilometers Scale, 500kilometers Scale, 1000kilometers Scale, 2000kilometers
Scale> d Map screen will be changed to selected scale.
Notes:
! These commands are available only when [km / mile] setting is [km].
! This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode.

Map Operation* d Change View Mode* d Map View, Driver’s View, 2D Twin Map View, 3D Twin Map View, Route View,
Guide View, Rear View, Vehicle Dynamics d Map screen will be changed to selected view mode.
Operating the map orientation
Map Operation* d Heading Up, North Up d Map orientation will be changed.
Recalculating the route
Route Options* d Change Route* d Rerouting, Use Main Road, Use Fast Route, Use Short Route, Use Freeway, Avoid
Freeway, Use Ferry, Avoid Ferry, Use Toll Road, Avoid Toll Road d If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to recalculate.

163

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
Checking the current route
Route Options* d Route Profile d Displaying the route profile screen.
Route Options* d Next Guidance d You can hear the information of next guidance point.
Canceling the route
Route Options* d Cancel Route d If the route is already set, touch VOICE icon to cancel the current route.
Route Options* d Cancel Waypoint d If the waypoint is already set, touch VOICE icon to cancel route until next waypoint.
Checking the traffic list
Traffic Information* d Traffic Events List d Displaying the traffic event list.
Traffic Information* d Traffic On Route List d Displaying the traffic event list on your route.
Traffic Information* d Traffic Flow List d Displaying the traffic flow list.
Erase the tracking
Other Operation* d Erase Tracks d Touch VOICE icon to delete the tracking.
Viewing the Emergency Info screen
Other Operation* d Emergency Information d Displaying the Emergency info screen.
Turning on or off the Overlay POI
Other Operation* d Display Overlay POI d Displaying the selected POI in Overlay POI.
Other Operation* d Hide Overlay POI d Turn off Overlay POI.

Voice commands related to hands-free phoning
The following verbal commands can be used
both in navigation screen and audio operation
screen.
Operating the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology
Call* d Telephone Book d d If the registered entry in phone book has telephone number data, touch VOICE icon to call the entry.
Call* d Call Registered Point d d If the registered location has telephone
number data, touch VOICE icon to call the registered location.
Call* d Redial d Touch VOICE icon to redial.
Call* d Call Phone Number d Say the number you want to call. d Touch VOICE icon to dial. (Note 1)
Call* d Received Call d Displaying the received call list.
Call* d Call Favorite X d Touch VOICE icon to dial.

164

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Call* d Call Home d Touch VOICE icon to call your home (Only when the phone number is registered in your home.)
Call* d Call d If the registered location has telephone number data, touch
VOICE icon to call the registered location.
(Note 1): International call with using “+” is not available in the voice operation.

Voice commands related to AV operation

Common AV commands
AV Operation* d Change Display* d Navigation Screen d Switching to the navigation map or menu screen.
AV Operation* d Change Display* d AV Screen d Switching to the Audio source screen.
AV Operation* d Source Off d Turning the Audio source off.
AV Operation* d Traffic Channel d Recalling the memorized traffic channel for XM or SiriusConnect universal tuner.
AV Operation* d Change Source* d CD, DVD, AM, FM, TV, MCD, AV Input, AUX, Sirius, iPod, XM, EXTERNAL1, EXTERNAL2, Music Library d Switching to the desired audio source. (You cannot switch to an unavailable source.)

Give the following verbal commands after
switching the correspond audio source.
Operation for Multi-CD
AV Operation* d Disc 1 to Disc 12 d Selecting the disc for playback.
Operation for FM
AV Operation* d Preset 1 to Preset 6 d Switching to that preset station directly.
AV Operation* d Change Band d Switching the band.

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

The following verbal commands can be used
both in navigation screen and audio operation
screen.

Operation for AM
AV Operation* d Preset 1 to Preset 6 d Switching to that preset station directly.
Operation for TV
AV Operation* d Preset 1 to Preset 12 d Switching to that preset station directly.
AV Operation* d Change Band d Switching the band.
Operation for XM, SIRIUS tuner
AV Operation* d Preset 1 to Preset 6 d Switching to that preset station directly.
AV Operation* d Change Band d Switching the band.
AV Operation* d Category Mode d Switching to the Category mode.

165

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
AV Operation* d All Channel Mode d Switching to the All Channel mode.
AV Operation* d Memo d Memorizing the title and artist information of that song to “My Mix”.
Operation for CD
AV Operation* d Change Media d Switching the CD-DA part and CD-ROM (MP3) part.
Operation for Music Library
AV Operation* d Music Search* d Album d d Playback the selected album playlist.
AV Operation* d Music Search* d d Playback the selected album playlist. (Note 2)
AV Operation* d Music Search* d Artist d d Playback the selected artist playlist.
AV Operation* d Music Search* d d Playback the selected artist playlist. (Note 2)
AV Operation* d Music Search* d Genre d d Playback the selected genre playlist.
AV Operation* d Music Search* d d Playback the selected genre playlist. (Note 2)
AV Operation* d Music Search* d My Favorites d My Favorite 1, My Favorite 2, My Favorite 3, My Favorite 4, My Mix d
Playback selected playlist.
AV Operation* d Music Search* d My Favorite 1, My Favorite 2, My Favorite 3, My Favorite 4, My Mix d Playback selected playlist. (Note 2)
AV Operation* d Track Search d d Playback the selected track. (Note 3)
(Note 2):This operation is available only when that group is already selected.
(Note 3):This operation is available for the playlist currently playing.

166

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
After checking traffic
information manually

Location screen (A) and (B)
Location screen (A)

Location screen (B)

The following commands can be vocalized:
Set As Destination
Same as above.
Set AS Waypoint
Same as above.
Display Map
Same as above.
Next
See the next POI.
Previous
See the previous POI.

The following commands can be vocalized:
Set As Destination
If there is no route, the system starts the route
calculation. If the route is already set, touch
VOICE icon to start route calculation.
Set AS Waypoint
Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.
Display Map
Displays the map of surroundings on that location.
Call here
If the location has telephone number data,
touch the VOICE icon to make a call to the location.

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

If traffic congestion is found after checking
the traffic information manually, “Do you
want to reroute?” appears on screen. In this
time, you can say voice commands to operate.
Options:
Yes:
The route will be recalculated by touching
VOICE icon.
No:
The route will not be recalculated and the map
screen of that location appears.

167

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
Other Voice Commands
The navigation system also can recognize the
words in the following list.

Other voice commands for
navigation operation

168

Preferential voice command

Other voice command

Back

Return, Before

Cancel

Escape, Skip

Current Location

My Location

Voice Help

Recognition Help, Help

Next, Following

Back Page

Basic Operation

Basics, Basic

Set As Destination

Set, Go, Route To Destination, Begin Guidance, Start

Set As Waypoint

Set Waypoint, Waypoint

Registration

Destination

Go To, Search

POI

Point Of Interest, Points Of Interest, Business Listing

Address

Addresses, Address Search, Search By Address

Area

Surrounding, Around

Telephone Number

Telephone, Phone Number

Address Book

Registered Points, My Addresses, Search By Address Book

Destination History

Search History, Destination List

Vicinity Search

Vicinity, Search Around, Search In Vicinity

Return Home

Go Home, Drive Home

Waypoint Home

Waypoint To Home, Registered Home As Waypoint

Call Home

Phone Home, Dial Home

Display Home

Show Home

Display Destination

Destination Map, Show Destination

Map Operation

Map, Map Option

Zoom Out

Out, Higher

Zoom In

In, Lower

Change Scale

Scale, Zoom

XXXX meter(s) Scale

XXX meter(s)

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
XXXX kilometer(s) Scale

XXXX kilometer(s)

XXXX mile(s) Scale

XXXX mile(s)

XXXX yards Scale

XXXX yards

Change View Mode

View Mode, Change View

Map View

Normal Map, Flat Map
Driver, 3D

2D Twin Map View

2D Twin, 2D Split

3D Twin Map View

3D Twin, 3D Split

Route View

Turns, Turn View

Guide View

Guide, Arrow

Rear View

Rear, Back View

Vehicle Dynamics

Dynamics, Meters

North Up

North, Compass

Heading Up

Head Up, Car Up

Route Options

Change Route Options

Change Route

Edit Route

Rerouting

New Route, Update Route

Use Main Road

Main Roads, Take Main Roads

Use Fast Route

Fast Route, Fastest Route

Use Short Route

Short Route, Shortest Route

Use Freeway

Motorways, Highways

Use Ferry

Ferry, Ferries

Use Toll Road

Toll Road, Payroad

Avoid Freeway

Avoid Highway, Avoid Interstate

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Driver’s View

Avoid Ferry

Avoid Ferries, Skip Ferries

Avoid Toll Road

Avoid Tolls, Avoid Pay

Cancel Route

Delete Route, Cancel Guidance

Route Profile

Profile

Cancel Waypoint

Delete Waypoint, Take Away Waypoint

Next Guidance

Following Guidance, Guidance After This

Traffic Information

Traffic, View Traffic Info, Display Traffic Information, Current Traffic Information, Display
Traffic Condition

Traffic Events List

Event List, Events, Traffic Events

Traffic On Route List

On Route List, Route List, Traffic On Route

Traffic Flow List

Flow List, Flows, Traffic Flow

169

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
Call

Dial, Ring, Dial Out , Place A Call, Make A Call

Call Registered Point

Call Address Book, Call Registered

Call Phone Number

Call By Number, Call Number, Call By Phone Number, Call Using Phone Number

Telephone Book

Tel Book, Phone Book

Redial

Call Again, Phone Again

Call Favorite X

Call X, Phone X

Received Call

Received, Who Called

Other Operation

Other, Others

Erase Tracks

Delete Tracks, Remove Tracks

Display Overlay POI

Show Overlay POI, Display POIs

Yes

Ok, I Agree

Not Ok, I Disagree

Other voice commands for AV operation

170

Preferential voice command

Other voice command

Navigation Screen

Navigation, Navi

AV Screen

AV, Audio

Change Source

Next Source, Source Change

Change To CD, Switch To CD

DVD

Change To DVD, Switch To DVD

Change To TV, Switch To TV

Change To AM, Switch To AM

Change To FM, Switch To FM

AV Input

Video Input

MCD

CD Changer

Music Library

Change To Music Library, Switch To Music Library

Music Search

Search My Music, Search Music

Album

Search By Album, Search Album

Artist

Search By Artist, Search Artist

Genre

Search By Genre, Search Genre

Rock/Pop

Rock, Pop

Hip-Hop/Rap

Rock, Pop

Soul/Urban

Soul, Urban

Track Search

Search By Track

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
iPod

Change To iPod, Switch To iPod

Change To XM, Switch To XM

Sirius

Change To Sirius, Switch To Sirius

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
En

171

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
Category list for vicinity search
p If you say the category name (category
title), the system searches for vicinity POIs
in that category without taking the chain
into consideration.
Category name:
Gas Station
76, ARCO, BP-AMOCO, CHEVRON, CITGO, CLARK,
CONOCO, ESSO, EXXON, FINA, GETTY, GULF, MOBIL,
PETROCANADA, PHILLIPS 66, SHELL, SINCLAIR, SUNOCO, TEXACO, ULTRAMAR, Gas Station-Others
Category name:
Bank & ATM
B B & T, BANK OF AMERICA, BANK OF MONTREAL,
BANK OF NEW YORK, BANK OF NOVA SCOTIA, CIBC
BANK, CITIBANK, HSBC BANK USA, J P MORGAN
CHASE, KEY BANK, LA SALLE BANK, LAURENTIAN
BANK OF CANADA, MELLON BANK, NATIONAL BANK
OF CANADA, PNC BANK, REGIONS BANK, ROYAL
BANK OF CANADA, SUN TRUST BANK, TD CANADA
TRUST, UNION BANK OF CALIFORNIA, US BANK, WACHOVIA BANK, WASHINGTON MUTUAL, WELLS
FARGO BANK, Bank & ATM-Others
Category name:
Restaurant
American, Asian, Barbecue, Café & Espresso, Chinese,
Continental, Creole-Cajun, French, Greek, Indian, Italian,
Japanese, Mexican, Pizzeria, Seafood, Steak House,
Thai, Restaurant-Others
Category name:
Fast Food Chains
ARBY'S, AU BON PAIN, BAJA FRESH, BASKIN-ROBBINS, BOSTON MARKET, BRAUM'S ICE CREAM &
DAIRY, BURGER KING, CARL'S JR., CARVEL ICE CREAM
BAKERY, CHURCH'S CHICKEN, COLD STONE CREAMERY, DAIRY QUEEN, DUNKIN DONUTS, HAAGEN-DAZS
ICE CREAM, HARDEE'S, HARVEY'S, IN-N-OUT BURGER,
JACK IN THE BOX, K F C, LONG JOHN SILVER'S, MC
DONALD'S, PANDA EXPRESS, PICK UP STIX, POPEYE'S
CHICKEN & BISCUITS, QUIZNOS, RUBIO'S, SECOND
CUP, SONIC, STARBUCK'S COFFEE, SUBWAY SANDWICHES & SALADS, TACO BELL, TACO JOHN'S, TCBY,
TIM HORTON'S, TJ CINNAMONS, TOGO'S, WENDY'S,
WHATABURGER

172

Category name:
Restaurant Chains
A & W FAMILY RESTAURANT, APPLEBEE'S, BENNIGAN'S, BOB'S BIG BOY, BONANZA, BONEFISH GRILL,
CARRABBA'S ITALIAN GRILL, CHILI'S GRILL & BAR,
CHUCK E CHEESE PIZZA, CLAIM JUMPER, COCO'S,
DOMINO'S PIZZA, FAZOLI'S, GODFATHER'S PIZZA,
GOLDEN CORRAL FAMILY STEAK HSE, IHOP RESTAURANT, KELSEY'S, LITTLE CAESARS PIZZA, LONE STAR
STEAKHOUSE, MARIE CALLENDER, OLIVE GARDEN
ITALIAN RSTRNT, OUTBACK STEAKHOUSE, PAPA
JOHN'S PIZZA, PASTA CONNECTION, PERKINS FAMILY
RESTAURANT, PIZZA HUT, PONDEROSA STEAK
HOUSE, RED LOBSTER, ROUND TABLE PIZZA, RUBY
TUESDAY, SHAKEY'S PIZZA, SIZZLER, SMOKEY BONES,
STEAK & ALE, SWISS CHALET, TGI FRIDAY'S, THE KEG
Category name:
Supermarkets
ACME, ALBERTSONS, ALDI, A & P, BI-LO, CUB FOODS,
CUMBERLAND FARMS, FOOD LION, GIANT, GIANT
EAGLE, H-E-B, HY-VEE, IGA, JEWEL-OSCO, KROGER,
MEIJER, PANTRY, PATHMARK, PIGGLY WIGGLY, PUBLIX,
RALEY'S, RALPH'S, SAFEWAY, SAVE-A-LOT, SHAW'S
SUPERMARKET, STOP & SHOP, STOP N GO, TOPS
FRIENDLY MARKET, VON'S, WHOLE FOODS, WINNDIXIE, Supermarkets-Others
Category name:
Automotive
AAA, RV/TRUCK FACILITY, Automobile Club, Parking,
Car Parts & Accessories, Car Repair Facility, Car Wash
Category name:
Retailer Chains
BURLINGTON COAT FACTORY, COSTCO, FACTORY 2-U,
KMART, KOHL’S, ROSS, SAM’S CLUB, STEIN MART, T J
MAXX, TARGET STORES, WAL-MART, Retailer ChainsOthers
Category name:
Hotel
AMERI HOST INN, BAYMONT INN & SUITES, BEST WESTERN, COURTYARD BY MARRIOTT, CROWNE PLAZA,
DAYS INN, DOUBLE TREE, ECONO LODGE, EMBASSY
SUITES, FAIRFIELD INN, HAMPTON INN, HILTON, HILTON GARDEN INN, HOLIDAY INN, HOLIDAY INN EXPRESS, HOMEWOOD SUITES, HOWARD JOHNSON,
HYATT, KNIGHTS INN, LA QUINTA INN, MARRIOTT,
MOTEL 6, QUALITY-COMFORT-CLARION, RAMADA INN,
RED ROOF INN, RESIDENCE INNS, SCOTTISH INN,
SHERATON, STAYBRIDGE SUITES, STUDIO 6, SUPER 8,
TRAVELODGE, WINGATE INN, Hotel-Others

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
Category name:
Car Dealer
ACURA, AUDI, BMW, BUICK, CADILLAC, CHEVROLET,
CHRYSLER, DAEWOO, DODGE, FORD, HONDA, HYUNDAI, INFINITI, ISUZU, JAGUAR, JEEP, KIA, LAND
ROVER, LEXUS, LINCOLN, MAZDA, MERCEDES-BENZ,
MITSUBISHI, NISSAN, OLDSMOBILE, PONTIAC,
PORSCHE, SAAB, SATURN, SUBARU, SUZUKI, TOYOTA, VOLKSWAGEN, VOLVO, Car Dealer-Others

Category name:
Medical
Doctor, Dentist, Veterinarian, Emergency Medical Service, Hospital, Pharmacy
Category name:
School
University & College, Nursery School, Elementary
School, Junior High School, High School, Vocational
School

Category name:
Rental and Other Services
Rental Car, Video Rental, Laundromat, Dry Cleaners

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Category name:
Electronics Retailer
BEST BUY, CIRCUIT CITY, COMP USA, FRY’S ELECTRONICS, RADIO SHACK, ULTIMATE ELECTRONICS, Electronics Retailer-Others
Category name:
Groceries
Liquor Store, Bakery, Butcher, Convenience Store, Delicatessen, Groceries-Others
Category name:
Shopping
Shopping Center, Beauty & Barber, Book Store, Music
Store, Fashion, Florist, Furniture, Home Improvement,
Glassware, House & Office, Optometrist, Shoes & Bags,
Sporting Goods, Toys, Cellular Phone Shop, ShoppingOthers
Category name:
Entertainment
Stadium & Arena, Brewery, Casino, Cinema, Night Club,
Theater & Play, Winery, Pub
Category name:
Leisure
Museum, Art Gallery, Zoo, Amusement Park, Fair
Ground, Beach, National Park & Forest, Camping & Hiking, Ski Resort, Bowling, Golf Course, Gym, Pool & Tennis, Travel Agency, Tourist Information, Tourist
Attraction, Park & Recreation
Category name:
Public Service & Facility
Police Station, Government Office, Post Office, Court
House, Convention Center, City Center, Library
Category name:
Transportation
Airline Access, Airport, Ferry Terminal, Train Station,
Rest Area

173

Appendix

Appendix
Troubleshooting
If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common
problems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. While this list is not comprehensive, it should answer your most common problems. If a solution to your problem cannot be
found here, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility.
Problems in the screen
Symptom

Cause

Power doesn’t turn on. The navi- Leads and connectors are incorgation system doesn’t operate. rectly connected.
The fuse is blown.

Action (See)
Confirm once more that all connections are
correct.
Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then
replace the fuse. Be very sure to install a correct fuse with the same rate.

Noise and other factors are causing Refer to “Page 187” and carry out appropriate
the internal memory to operate inmeasures.
correctly.

When the ignition switch is
turned ON (or turned to ACC),
the motor sounds.

The hard disk drive is not working
because the temperature is extremely low or high.

Wait until the temperature inside the vehicle
falls or rises.

This system confirms whether a
disc is loaded or not.

This is a normal operation.

The navigation does not boot up. The power cable is not wired correctly.

Turn the system off and the check the wiring.

The hard disk drive is not running
Wait until the inside of the vehicle warms up.
because the temperature is too low.
The hard disk drive is defective.

174

Consult your authorized Pioneer dealer.

Appendix

Appendix
Check the GPS signal reception and the position of the GPS antenna if necessary, or continue driving until reception improves. Keep
the antenna clear. (Page 90)

Appendix

The quality of signals from the GPS
You cannot position your vehicle satellites is poor, causing reduced
positioning accuracy. Such a loss of
on the map or the positioning
signal quality may happen for the
error is large.
following reasons:
• The GPS antenna is in an unsuitable location.
• Obstacles are blocking signals
from the satellites.
• The position of satellites relative to
your vehicle is bad.
• Signals from the GPS satellites
have been modified to reduce accuracy. (GPS satellites are operated by
the US Department of Defense, and
the US government reserves the
right to distort positioning data for
military reasons. This may lead to
greater positioning errors.)
• If a vehicle phone or cellular
phone is used near the GPS antenna, GPS reception may be lost temporarily.
• Do not cover the GPS antenna
with spray paint or vehicle wax, because this may block the reception
of GPS signals. Snow buildup can
also degrade the signals.

Signals from the vehicle’s speed
Check that the cables are properly connected.
pulse are not being picked up prop- If necessary, consult the dealer that installed
erly.
the system.
The navigation system may not be
mounted securely in your vehicle.

Check that the navigation system is securely
mounted and, if necessary, consult the dealer
that installed the system.

Your vehicle is operating in Simple
hybrid mode.

Connect the speed signal input (pink lead
wire) of the power cable correctly, and reset
the 3D Hybrid Sensor memory ([Learning
Status]).

The navigation system is installed
with an extreme angle exceeding
the limitation of the installation
angle.

Confirm the installation angle. (The navigation system must be installed within the allowed installation angle. For details, refer to
“Installation Manual” and [Installation
Angle Setup].) (Page 92)

Indication of the position of your ve- Check whether or not the reverse gear signal
hicle is misaligned after a U-turn or input lead (purple) is connected properly.
reversing.
(The navigation system works properly without the lead connected, but positioning accuracy will be adversely affected.)
The map continually reorients it- The traveling direction is always set
self.
to Heading Up.

on the screen and change the map
Touch
display.

175

Appendix

Appendix
[Day] is selected to [Day/Night Dis- Check [Day/Night Display] setting and make
play].
sure [Automatic] is selected. (Page 50)
The daylight display is used
even when the vehicle lights are
The orange/white lead is not conCheck the connection.
on.
nected.
The display is very dim.

The vehicle’s light is turned ON, and Read about [Day/Night Display] setting and,
[Automatic] is selected on [Day/
if desired, select [Day]. (Page 50)
Night Display].
The vehicle cabin temperature is ex- A Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) is used, and
tremely low.
such displays tend to darken when cold. Wait
for the vehicle to warm up.

No sounds are heard.
The volume level will not rise.

Picture quality adjustment of the
display is not correct.

Adjust the picture quality. (Page 153)

Display tilt is not at the proper setting.

Press and hold EJECT button to adjust the tilt.

The volume level is low.

Adjust the volume level.

The attenuator or mute is on.

Turn the attenuator or mute off.

The speaker lead is disconnected.

Check the connection.

The volume of beeps and naviga- You cannot adjust these parameters Turn the volume up or down with [Volume] in
tion guidance cannot be adwith VOL (a/b) button.
[Settings] menu.
justed.
Adjusting the volume of naviga- You cannot adjust them with VOL
tion guidance and beeps is not (a/b) button.
possible.

Turn the volume up or down according to [Volume] in [Settings] menu. (Page 88)

A strange sound is heard when The sound for the entry of [Address Set the sound setting of that entry to [No
the vehicle comes close to a cer- Book] is set.
Sound]. (Page 63)
tain place (e.g. Dog barking).
An alarm sounds when you approach the registered location
and the set image pops up, regardless of whether [Address
Book Icon] is set to [Off].

This is a normal operation and not a To turn off the sound output and image pop
malfunction.
up, select [No Sound] and [No Picture].

Slope is not displayed on Vehicle Dynamics screen.
“Inclination” does not move on
3D Calibration Status screen.

The speed pulse lead is not connected.

Connect the speed pulse lead.

No sound, no voice.

has been set, or sound volume
is reduced to 0.

Adjust the volume of the guidance or turn
off. (Page 88)

The person on the other end of
the phone call cannot hear the
conversation due to an echo.

The voice from the person on the
other end of the phone call is output
from the speakers and then picked
up by the microphone again, creating an echo.

Use the following methods to reduce the
echo:
—Lower the volume on the receiver
—Have both speakers pause slightly before
speaking

The registered phone cannot be Normally, the registered phone can- ! Overwrite the old registered phone with a
deleted.
not be deleted.
new phone.
! Clear [Phone Settings]. (Page 187)

176

Appendix

CD or DVD playback is not possible.

The disc is inserted upside down.

Insert the disc with the label upward.

The disc is dirty.

Clean disc.

The disc is cracked or otherwise da- Insert a normal, round disc.
maged.
The files on the CD are an irregular
file format.

Check the file format.

The CD format cannot be played
back.

Replace disc.

The loaded disc is a type this system Check what type the disc is. (Also see “Handcannot play.
ling and Care of the Disc” in the hardware
manual and “Page 199” for more cautions
about handling each type of media.)
The parking brake lead is not connected or applied.

Connect a parking brake lead correctly, and
apply the parking brake.

Parking brake interlock is activated. Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply
the parking brake. (Page 22)
[AV Input] setting is incorrect.

Please read the following page and set the
setting correctly. (Page 150)

The audio skips.

The navigation system is not firmly
secured.

Secure the navigation system firmly.

Failure hard disk drive.

Consult your Pioneer dealer.

“Rear display” picture disappears.

The setting for [REAR SCREEN] is in- Please read the following page and set the
correct.
rear screen setting correctly. (Page 153)

Appendix

No picture.

There was a problem with the “Rear Check the “Rear display” and its connection.
display” or a faulty wiring connection, for example.

Nothing is displayed and the
touch panel keys cannot be
used.

When the shift lever is in [R], the
rear view camera images are displayed. (When [MIRROR] is selected
in [REAR SCREEN] menu.)

Select [DVD] or [AV] in [REAR SCREEN]
menu. When you move the shift lever to a position other than [R], the screen will be returned to the previous display.

[DVD-V Setup] is carried out.

You can not display the video image to “Rear
display” during [DVD-V Setup] menu.

The setting for the rear view camera Connect a rear view camera correctly.
is incorrect.
The shift lever was placed in [R]
when the rear view camera was not
connected.

Press AV button to return to the source display and then select the correct polarity setting for [Camera Input]. (Page 149)

The back light of the LCD panel is
turned off.

Press V button to turn on the back light.

Touch panel key is not respond
or a different key is responding.

Touch panel keys deviate from the
actual positions that respond to
your touch for some reason.

Perform the touch panel calibration. (Page
190)

CD recording is not possible.

A disc that cannot be recorded,
such as MP3 disc or DVD-video, is
inserted.

A disc other than a normal music CD cannot
be recorded.

177

Appendix

Appendix
Music Library recording will be can- Wait until the current track has ended or
celed after playback of the current
change the source manually.
CD recording doesn’t stop
though the record progress indi- track is finished. (The recording
mode stops at the interval of the
cator shows 100 %.
tracks.)
“NO SIGNAL” is displayed at the While waiting for a response from
right corner on the map.
the XM tuner.

Wait for a while and try the operation again.

You are in an area that cannot receive XM tuner reception.

Move into an area that can receive XM tuner
reception.

Your current location provides very
poor reception.

Change your location.

“UPDATING” is displayed at the
right corner on the map.

Service subscription is either XM
audio only or XM NavTraffic stand
alone.

Since the GEX-P10XMT is capable of receiving
both XM audio and XM NavTraffic service, if
you are subscribed to only one or the other,
the system checks to see if you have added
another service to your account since you
last powered on the navigation system. When
you subscribe to both services, this message
will stop appearing when you turn the ignition
ON (ACC ON).

No sounds are heard.
The volume level will not rise.

Cables are not connected correctly.

Connect the cables correctly.

The system is performing still, slow There is no sound during still, slow motion, or
motion, or frame-by-frame playback frame-by-frame playback with DVD-video.
with DVD-video.
The system is paused or performing, For an MP3, there is no sound on fast rewind
fast rewind or forward during the
or forward.
MP3 disc playback.
“DTS” is selected for the DVD-Video
disc sound track.

is displayed, and op- The operation is not compatible
The icon
eration is not possible.
with the DVD’s configuration.

This operation is not possible. (For example,
the DVD playing does not feature that angle,
audio system, subtitle language, etc.)

The picture stops (pauses) and
the unit cannot be operated.

Reading of data has become impos- After touching g once, start playback once
sible during DVD playback.
more.

The picture is stretched, the aspect is incorrect.

The aspect setting is incorrect for
the display.

Select the appropriate setting for that image.
(Page 149, Page 148)

A parental lock message is displayed and DVD playback is not
possible.

Parental lock is on.

Turn parental lock off or change the level.
(Page 148)

Parental lock for DVD playback
cannot be canceled.

The code number is incorrect.

Input the correct code number. (Page 148)

Playback is not with the audio
The DVD playing does not feature
language and subtitle language dialog or subtitles in the language
settings selected in [DVD-V
selected in [DVD-V Setup].
Setup].

178

Switch to a non “DTS” sound track.

Switching to a selected language is not possible if the language selected in [DVD-V
Setup] is not recorded on the disc.

Appendix

Dialing is not possible because
the touch panel keys for dialing
are inactive.

Your phone is out of range for service.

Retry after entering within range for service.

The connection between cellular
Perform the connection process.
phone and the Bluetooth unit (sold
separately) (navigation system) cannot be established now.
The cellular phone is not registered
to the navigation system yet.

To use the cellular phone featuring the Bluetooth wireless technology with this navigation
system, the registration process is necessary.

Appendix

When the screen is frozen...
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and cut off
the engine. Turn the ignition key back to “Acc
off”. Then start the engine again, and turn the
power to the navigation system back on. If this
does not solve the problem, press RESET button on the navigation system.

Messages and How to React to Them
The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system.
p There are occasions when you may see
error messages other than those shown
here. In such a case, follow the instructions
given on the display.
Messages for navigation functions
Message

When

Irregular speed pulse signal
detected. Please power off
the system and check the installation. Then, please reboot the system and press
“OK”.

If the Navigation system does not re- Consult your Pioneer dealer.
ceive the vehicle speed pulse.

What to do (See)

Speed pulse not connected.
Calibration will start without
speed pulse. Accuracy is not
fully ensured without speed
pulse.

The speed signal input (pink lead
wire) of the power cable is not connected.

To operate with 3D hybrid mode, connect the
speed signal input (pink lead wire) of the
power cable correctly.
Although it can be operated with Simple hybrid mode without connecting the speed signal input, the precision of the positioning will
be less accurate.

179

Appendix

Appendix
The navigation unit is installed in a
place where it may be affected by a
Vibration detected. Please
large vibration.
power off the system and
check the installation. Then,
please re-boot the system and
press “OK”.

Re-install the navigation unit in a place where
the unit will not be affected by vibration.

Direction of G sensor is not
Direction of G sensor is set incorcorrect. Please power off the rectly.
system and check the installation. Then, please re-boot the
system and press “OK”.

See the Installation Manual and set the direction of the navigation unit correctly.

Gyro Sensor is not working
properly. Please consult your
dealer or Pioneer service center.

Write down the error code shown on the
screen. Turn off the power, and then contact
your nearest Pioneer service facility.

Abnormal Gyrosensor output is detected.

Positioning is not possible
The location display is not possible
due to the hardware. Please
due to hardware failure.
contact your dealer or Pioneer
service center.

Consult your dealer.

GPS antenna problem detected. Please contact your
dealer or Pioneer service center.

Consult your dealer.

The location display is not possible
due to failure of the GPS antenna.

This function is currently una- The screen cannot be displayed with If the sensor learning status reaches the Senvailable.
Vehicle Dynamics Display. The sen- sor Initializing, the system is ready to be
sor has not been taught so the sen- used.
sor information cannot be acquired.
The vertical installation angle If the mounting angle of the naviga- The system initializes the sensor in order to
is changed. Gyro Sensor cali- tion unit has been changed.
operate it with the maximum performance
bration is re-initialized.
and automatically starts re-learning.
Excess vertical installation
angle detected. Please install
the navigation unit correctly.

The navigation system is installed
with an extreme angle exceeding
the limitation of the installation
angle.

Confirm the installation angle. (The navigation system must be installed within the allowed installation angle. For details refer to
Installation Manual.)

No data available at this time.

No data is available that can be
used with the XM tuner.

Wait for a while and try the operation again.

UPDATING (Updating)

The selected channel is not included in your subscription.

Select another channel.

Radio is being updated with the latest encryption code.

Wait until the encryption code is fully updated.

Route calculation was not
possible.

180

Route calculation has failed be! Change the destination.
cause of a malfunction in map data, ! Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this messoftware, or hardware.
sage persists.

Route calculation not possible The destination is too far.
because destination is too far.

! Set a destination closer to the starting
point.
! Set one or more waypoints.

Route calculation not possible The destination or waypoint(s) are
because destination is too
too close.
close.

Set a destination and waypoint(s) farther
from the starting point.

Appendix

Appendix
• The destination or waypoint(s) are
Route calculation not possible in a Control Traffic Zone (CTR) and
the route calculation is hampered.
due to traffic regulations.
• Your vehicle is currently in a Control Traffic Zone (CTR) and the route
calculation is hampered.

! Set a destination and waypoint(s) outside
the CTR if you know where the restricted area
is.
! Try a destination or waypoint(s) away from
the currently set points to some extent.
! Drive your vehicle to an unrestricted area
and reset the destination and waypoint(s).

The destination, waypoint(s), or
! Set a destination and waypoint(s) on roads.
starting point are in an area where ! Reset the destination after you drive the veno road exists (e.g. a mountain) and hicle to any road.
the route calculation is impossible.

Route to destination cannot
be calculated.

The destination or waypoint(s) are in Change the destination.
an isolated island, etc. without a
ferry and the route calculation is impossible. If there is no road connected to your starting point or
destination, this message will appear.

• Ferry could not be avoided.
• Toll roads could not be
avoided.
• Freeway could not be
avoided.
• Ferry, toll roads and freeways could not be avoided.
• Ferry and toll roads could
not be avoided.
• Toll roads and freeways
could not be avoided.
• Ferry and freeways could
not be avoided.

These messages appear when a
If the current route is not desired, set destinaferry route, toll roads, or freeways
tion or waypoints that do not pass through a
are included in the route to the des- ferry route, toll roads, or freeways. (Page 32)
tination or waypoints even though a
route is set to avoid them.
You can identify these condition by
the icons.

The address does not exist. Do
you want to continue?

The house number entered does not Re-enter the existing house number. Or, proexist in the database for the speciceed to the next step without entering the
fied street.
house number and set the main point of that
street as your destination.

Appendix

Route calculation not possible
because navigation cannot be
provided around destination
or starting point.

This area does not contain
Facilities of the selected category do Use another search method or move to anany POI's of the selected type. not exist in the surrounding areas. other location and perform Vicinity Search
again.
Failed to make the route profile.

In rare cases, a route calculation
error may occur.

There is no Traffic List.

There is no available traffic informa- Move to the location where you can receive
tion now.
the XM NavTraffic information, and then try
the operation again.

! Retry.
! Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this message persists.

There is no pictures folder.
Cannot load the image because Pic- Use the appropriate data after reading “Page
Please create /Pictures/ folder tures folder is not found in the in94”.
and store JPEG files in that
serted disc.
Folder.

181

Appendix

Data Read error.

JPEG file is corrupt.

Failed to read the data because the
CD-R is damaged or dirty. Or, the
pick-up lens of the DVD drive is
dirty.

Try re-reading the data by inserting a clean
CD-R. Clean the pick-up lens with a commercially available cleaning kit for DVD, then try
to reading again.

Pictures folder exists on the CD-R
but no data in JPEG format exists.

Use the appropriate data after reading “Page
94”.

The data is damaged or an attempt
was made to set a JPEG image that
was not made to specifications as
the background picture.

Use the appropriate data after reading “Page
94”.

CAUTION!
Parking brake lead is incorrectly
System detected improper con- connected.
nection of Parking Brake lead.
Please check your configuration
for safety. Please see Operation
Manual for more information regarding safe operation.
Connection failed.

Confirm once more that their connections are
correct.

The cellular phone’s Bluetooth wire- Turn the target phone’s Bluetooth wireless
less technology is turned off.
technology on.
The cellular phone is paired (connected) with another device.

Cancel the pairing (connection) and retry.

Rejection has been received from
the cellular phone.

Operate the target phone and accept the connection request from the navigation system.
(Furthermore, check the connection settings
on your cellular phone.)

The target cellular phone can not be Check whether your cellular phone is turned
found.
off and, whether the distance to your cellular
phone is too far.
Registration step has been success- Retry the registration and if a connection still
ful but connection has failed for
cannot be established, try connecting using
some reason.
your cellular phone.
Registration failed.

182

The cellular phone’s Bluetooth wire- Keep turning the target phone’s Bluetooth
less technology is turned off during wireless technology on during the registrathe registration step.
tion.
Rejection by the cellular phone has
received.

Operate the target phone and accept the registration request from the navigation system.
(Furthermore, check the connection settings
on your cellular phone.)

Registration step has failed for
some reason.

Retry the registration and if the registration
still fails, try registering using your cellular
phone.

Automatic connection in progress. Please try again later.

If you try to perform another operation during automatic connection
by the system.

! Wait for a while and retry.
! Establish that connection temporarily and
retry that later.

Automatic connection in progress. Please try manually
later.

If you try to connect another phone Establish that connection temporarily and
during automatic connection by the retry it later.
system.

Appendix

Could not find any available
phone.

No available phone exists in the surroundings when the system
searches for the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology for registration.

! Turn the target phone’s Bluetooth wireless
technology on.
! Check whether your cellular phone is
turned off and, whether the distance to your
cellular phone is too far.

If the Bluetooth unit (sold sepa! Check the connection and retry.
rately) is disconnected from this na- ! Establish that connection temporarily and
vigation system or Bluetooth unit
retry later.
carries out another processing
when the system search the cellular
phone featuring Bluetooth wireless
technology for registration.

Bluetooth unit error. The device name could not be set.

If the Bluetooth unit (sold sepa! Check the connection and retry.
rately) is disconnected from this na- ! Establish that connection temporarily and
vigation system or the Bluetooth
retry later.
unit carries out another process
when you change the device name.

Registration is not available.

If you try to perform another operation immediately after connection
failure.

Reading failed.

If you transferred the data from your Select just a suitable item, format, and then
cellular phone in a format can not
retry.
be received with navigation system.
Disconnection has been made during transfer for some reason.

Wait for a while and retry.

Appendix

Bluetooth unit error. It is not
possible to find any mobile
phones.

Connect your cellular phone again and retry.

Calibration failed. Please refer The touch panel calibration has not Please read the instruction of touch panel cato the owner’s manual.
been carried out with appropriate
libration and retry. (Page 190)
steps.
The HDD is not connected.

Failure of the built-in hard disk drive Consult your dealer.
has occurred, such as internal electrical problem or file system error.

Cannot use HDD.

Failure of the built-in hard disk drive Consult your dealer.
has occurred, such as internal electrical problem or file system error.

There is no applicable program.

Failure of the built-in hard disk drive Consult your dealer.
has occurred, such as internal electrical problem or file system error.

The HDD cannot be operated
due to excessive heat. Please
move your vehicle to a safe
place and turn the power off
until the temperature goes
down.

Hard disk drive cannot run due to
high temperature.

Park your vehicle to safe place, turn the ignition switch off, and wait until the temperature
inside the vehicle drops.

183

Appendix

Appendix
Messages for Audio Functions
When problems occur in the audio source, a message may appears on the display. Refer to the
table below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error persists,
contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Service Center.
Built-in DVD drive
Message

When

What to do (See)

Unreadable disc

If you try to use a disc which is incompatible with this system.

Insert a suitable disc.

If you insert a disc upside down.

Insert the disc with the label upward.

If the disc is dirty.

Clean the disc.

If the disc is cracked or otherwise
damaged.

Insert a normal, round disc.

Mechanical failure of DVD drive occurs.

Consult your Pioneer dealer.

Playback error. Please remove Electrical or mechanical error has
the disc.
occurred.

Press RESET button. (Also see the Hardware
Manual.) (Page 187)

Region code error

The disc does not have the same re- Replace the DVD-Video with one bearing the
gion number as the navigation sys- correct region number.
tem.

Playback error due to irregular temperature. Please remove the disc.

The temperature of the built-in DVD Park your vehicle in safe place, turn the ignidrive exceeds the operating limits.
tion switch off, and wait until the built-in DVD
drive’s temperature returns to within normal
operating limits.

ATTENTION! Viewing of front Parking brake interlock is activated. Park your vehicle in the safe place and apply
seat video source while drivthe parking brake. (Page 22)
ing is strictly prohibited.
Search error

The title number, chapter number,
time, or 10 key command that you
enter in [10Key Search] do not
exist. (This message will appear
when the DVD drive cannot accept
that command.)

Enter the available numbers or 10 key command or use another search method.

Hard disk drive (Music Library)

184

Message

When

What to do (See)

This CD cannot be recorded

If you insert a CD which prohibits
second-generation copies or duplicate.

Use another CD and retry.

• Recording error. Switching
to CD playback mode
• Recording error. Recording
is stopped
• The recording was unstable.
Restart the recording from
the beginning of the track.

If recording can not be carried out
due to continuous skipping on certain part of the disc because the
disc is dirty, scratched, or otherwise
damaged, the pick-up lens of the
DVD drive is dirty, or extreme vibration occurs continuously.

! Clean the disc and retry.
! Clean the pick-up lens with a commercially
available cleaning kit for DVD, then retry.
! Retry in vibration-free condition.

Appendix

Exceeded playlist maximum.
No more playlists can be recorded.

If you try to record a new CD but the Delete some playlists and retry.
maximum number of playlists are
already recorded. (The album playlist can be stores up to 400.)

Playback error. Music Library
cannot be played

The music library component is abnormal.

This playlist cannot store
more than 99 tracks.

If you try to add tracks but My Mix Delete some tracks and retry.
or My Favorite playlists are maximum number. (My Mix and My Favorite playlists can store the tracks
up to 99.)

This track cannot be added to The music library component is abMyMix.
normal.

Consult your dealer.

Some invalid characters have been Enter different characters so that the system
entered and the system cannot con- can pronounce it.
vert it to the appropriate pronunciation.

Single recording mode will
only record the first track of
CD

Recording tracks other than the first When you set [Single] in [REC Mode], the
track of CD when the recording
system only can record the first track of CD.
mode is [Single].
Set [Auto] or [Manual] in [REC Mode] and
retry. (Page 152)

HDD is full. This CD cannot be There is no free space for recording
recorded
in the hard disk drive.

Appendix

Name cannot be used for
voice recognition. Try again.

Delete some tracks or playlists and try again
if you want to record that CD.

Unable to select appropriate
Track info due to multiple entries in the database.

Some corresponding data is found Enter the title manually, or try to retrieve the
in the Gracenote® Database, but the title by touching [Update Title].
system cannot select one to append
a title.

All artist names in the playlist
have been deleted because
no character has been entered. Do you want to proceed?

If you try to delete the artist name
entirely. The artist will not be displayed in the artist group and artist
name on the information plate also
will not be displayed.

If you enter the artist name again, the artist
name appears.

Message

When

What to do (See)

Search failed.

iPod is preparing playback. Therefore, the operation is invalid now.

Wait until [Ready] disappears and try the operation.

Invalid command - the memo
has not been stored.

• If you try to memorize 000 Channel to My Mix.
• If you try to memorize a channel
that is OFF AIR to My Mix.
• If you try to memorize a channel
to My Mix while an XM tuner error
occurs.

Tune an appropriate channel and memorize
it.

Invalid command - the CH has
not been stored.

• If you try to memorize 000 or 001 Tune an appropriate channel and memorize
Channel to T button’s preset.
it.
• If you try to memorize a channel
that is OFF AIR to T button’s preset.
• If you try to memorize a channel
to T button’s preset while an XM
tuner error occurs.

Other sources

185

Appendix

186

Appendix

Appendix
Returning the Navigation
System to the Default or
Factory Settings

= For details, refer to If system errors frequently occur on page 190
Method 4: [Clear user information from
hard disk] on start-up
Clears all user data (including Music Library)
stored in the hard disk drive.

Appendix

You can return settings or recorded contents
to the default or factory settings. There are
four methods to clear user data, and the situations and the cleared contents are different for
each method. For the contents that are cleared
in each method, see the list presented later.
p The map data and the system data are not
cleared from the hard disk drive by any
clearing method.
Method 1: RESET button
Pressing RESET button clears almost all settings of the audio function.

Clears the setting values stored in the hard
disk drive.

= For details, refer to Completely returning the
navigation system to the initial state on page
190
The system becomes the same state when the
battery of the vehicle is removed or the yellow
lead of the navigation system is disconnected.

Method 2: [Restore Factory Settings]
Clears some items in [Map] menu and in [Settings] menu.

= For details, refer to Restoring the Default Setting on page 96
Method 3: [Reset] on start-up

187

Appendix

Appendix
Setting items to be deleted
The items to be deleted vary depending on the
reset method. The items listed in the following
table return to the default or factory settings.
The items not listed below will be retained.
However, if you carry out [Clear user information from hard disk], all the settings related to the navigation function including
the items not listed below are deleted.
— : The setting will be retained.
1 : The setting will be cleared and returned to
the default or factory settings.
Navigation functions

Map function

Route Setting

[Destination] menu

[Information] menu

188

Method 1

Method 2

Method 3

Method 4

View mode and scale setting on
the map

—

Direction of the map

—

Last cursor position on the map
screen

—

Current route

—

Guidance state of the current
route

—

Vehicle position information

—

Route conditions

—

Auto fill-in function for cities and
streets

—

Point registered in [Address
Book]

—

Sorting order selected in [Address Book]

—

Sorting order selected in [Traffic
Events], [Traffic On Route], and
[Traffic Flow]

—

[Traffic Settings]

—

[Phone Settings] ([Phone
Menu])

—

[Phone Book], [Dial Favorites],
[Dialed Numbers], [Received
Calls] ([Phone Menu])

—

[Stock Info]

—

[My Favorites]

—

[Emergency Info]

—

Appendix

—

[Displayed Info], [Overlay POI],
[Day/Night Display], [AV Guide
Mode], [Road Color]

—

[Language] ([Regional Settings]), [Time] ([Regional Settings]), [Installation Angle
Setup] ([Hardware]), [Defined
Locations], [Modify Current Location], [Background Picture
Setting]

—

Items other than above

—

[3D Calibration Status] ([Hardware])

—

[Vehicle Dynamics]

Right and left gauge type, [Adjust Look]

—

[Audio Settings]

All items

—

[System Settings]

[Mute Set], [Clock DISP], [REC
Mode]

—

Other items

—

[Map] menu

[Settings] menu

Audio functions

Method 1

Method 2

Method 3

Method 4

Repeat, Random settings

—

Track data

—

Playlist

—

Last playback position

—

Music Library [LIBRARY]

[XM]

Alert on/off for My Mix

—

[DVD]

All settings

—

[CD]

All settings

—

[ROM](MP3)

All settings

—

[FM]

Preset memory and the other
settings

—

[AM]

Preset memory and the other
settings

—

[TV]

Preset memory and the other
settings

—

[REAR SCREEN]

Rear Screen setting

—

Picture Adjust

—

Display Tilt

—

Others

Appendix

[Short-Cut Selection],[View
Mode]

189

Appendix

Appendix
If system errors frequently occur
If system errors frequently occur and the
power to the navigation system turns off, inappropriate content may have been recorded in
the memory or the hard disk drive. In such a
case, normal operations may be restored by
clearing the setting values stored in the hard
disk drive.
1 Start the engine.
After a few moments, the start-up screen
comes on for a few seconds.
2 Touch and hold MAP button while the
start-up screen is displayed.
“Clear memory screen” appears.
3

Touch [Reset].

4 Touch [Yes].
The setting values stored in the hard disk drive
return to the default or factory settings. After
that, the navigation splash screen appears.

5 Touch [Clear user information from
hard disk].
p This reset operation clears all music data
recorded in the music library. Note that the
cleared data cannot be restored.

6 Touch [Yes].
The user area in the hard disk drive is initialized. After that, the navigation system restarts.
7 Press MENU button and then touch
[Settings].
The setting menu appears.
8 Touch [Hardware] and then touch [3D
Calibration Status].
9 Touch [Learning Status] and then touch
[Reset All].

Completely returning the
navigation system to the initial
state
To return the entire navigation system to the
default or factory settings, initialize the navigation system in the following order:
1 Press RESET button on the hardware.
2 Initialize the user data area on the hard disk
drive.
3 Clear the learned data in the sensor.

Turn the ignition switch off.

Press RESET button.

3 Start the engine.
After a few moments, the start-up screen
comes on for a few seconds.
4 Touch and hold MAP button while the
start-up screen is displayed.
“Clear memory screen” appears.

190

Adjusting the Response
Positions of the Touch Panels
(Touch Panel Calibration)
If you feel that the touch panel keys on the
screen deviate from the actual positions that
respond to your touch, adjust the response positions of the touch panel. There are two adjustment methods: 4-point adjustment, in
which you touch four corners of the screen;
and 16-point adjustment, in which you make
fine-adjustments on the entire screen.

Appendix

Appendix
p Make sure to use the supplied stylus for adjustment, and gently touch the screen. If
you press the touch panel forcefully, the
touch panel may be damaged. Do not use
a sharp pointed tool such as a ballpoint
pen or a mechanical pen. Otherwise the
screen is damaged.
Stylus (supplied with navigation
system)

6 Gently touch the center of + mark displayed on the screen with the touch panel
adjustment pen.
After you touch all marks, the adjusted position data is saved.
p Do not turn off the engine while saving the
adjusted position data.
p Press V button to return to the previous adjustment position.
p To cancel the adjustment, press MAP button.

1 Press V button.
The Picture Adjust screen appears.
2 Press and hold V button for two seconds or more.
The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen appears.
3 Touch and hold each of the arrows on
the four corners of the screen with the
touch panel adjustment pen.
Hold the pen on the arrow until each one of
the four arrows turns red.

p If touch panel adjustment cannot be performed properly, consult your local Pioneer
dealer.

Appendix

7 Press MAP button.
The adjustment is complete.

Positioning Technology
The navigation system accurately measures
your current location by combining the positioning by GPS and by Dead Reckoning.

Positioning by GPS
The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a
network of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each
of the satellites, which orbit at a height of
68 900 000 feet (21 000 km), continually broadcasts radio signals giving time and position information. This ensures that signals from at
least three can be picked up from any open
area on the ground’s surface.

4 Press V button.
The adjusted position data is saved.
p Do not turn off the engine while saving the
adjusted position data.
p Press MAP button to complete the 4-point
adjustment.

5 Press V button.
The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen
appears.

191

Appendix

Appendix
The accuracy of the GPS information depends
on how good the reception is. When the signals are strong and reception is good, GPS
can determine latitude, longitude and altitude
for accurate positioning in three dimensions.
But if signal quality is poor, only two dimensions, latitude and longitude, can be obtained
and positioning errors are somewhat greater.

less accurate. Also, when the positioning by
GPS is not available, such as when your vehicle enters a long tunnel, the discrepancy between your actual and calculated position may
become bigger.
p The speed pulse data comes from the
speed sensing circuit. The location of this
speed sensing circuit depends on your vehicle model. In some cases, it is impossible
to make a connection to it, and in such a
case we recommend that ND-PG1 speed
pulse generator (sold separately) be used.

How do GPS and dead
reckoning work together?

Positioning by dead reckoning
The 3D Hybrid Sensor in the navigation system
also calculates your position. The current location is measured by detecting driving distance
with the speed pulse, the turning direction
with the Gyrosensor and inclination of the
road with the G sensor.
The 3D Hybrid Sensor can even calculate
changes of altitude, and corrects for discrepancies in the distance traveled caused by
driving along winding roads or up slopes.
Also, the navigation system learns the driving
conditions and stores information in the memory; thus, as you drive more, the precision of
the positioning becomes more accurate.
The method of positioning changes as follows
depending on whether the speed pulse of your
vehicle is detected or not:
3D hybrid mode
This is active when the speed pulse is detected. Inclination of a street can be detected.
Simple hybrid mode
When the speed pulse is not detected, positioning is performed in this mode. Only horizontal movement is detected, so it becomes

192

For maximum accuracy, your navigation system continually compares GPS data with your
estimated position as calculated from the data
of 3D Hybrid Sensor. However, if only the data
from the 3D Hybrid Sensor is available for a
long period, positioning errors are gradually
compounded until the estimated position becomes unreliable. For this reason, whenever
GPS signals are available, they are matched
with the data of the 3D Hybrid Sensor and
used to correct it for improved accuracy.
To ensure maximum accuracy, the dead reckoning system learns with experience. By comparing the position it estimates with your
actual position as obtained using GPS, it can
correct for various types of error, such as tire
wear and the rolling motion of your vehicle. As
you drive, the dead reckoning system gradually gathers more data, learns more, and the
accuracy of its estimates gradually increases.
So, after you have driven some distance, you
can expect your position as shown on the map
to show fewer errors.
p If you use chains on your wheels for winter
driving or put on the spare wheel, errors
may suddenly increase because of difference in wheel diameter. The system detects
the fact that the tire diameter has changed,
and automatically replaces the value for
calculating distance.

Appendix

Appendix
p If ND-PG1 is used or if your vehicle is operating in Simple hybrid mode, the distance
calculation value cannot be replaced automatically.

Map matching

! If signals cannot be received from more
than two GPS satellites, GPS positioning
does not take place.
! In some driving conditions, signals from
GPS satellites may not reach your vehicle.
In this case, it is impossible for the system
to use GPS positioning.

Appendix

As mentioned, the GPS and dead reckoning
systems used by this navigation system are
susceptible to certain errors. Their calculations may, on occasion, place you in a location
on the map where no road exists. In this situation, the processing system understands that
vehicles travel only on roads, and can correct
your position by adjusting it to a nearby road.
This is called map matching.

When the positioning by GPS is
impossible

In tunnels or enclosed parking garages

Under elevated roads or similar structures
With map matching

When driving among high buildings

Without map matching
When driving through a dense forest or
tall trees

Handling Large Errors
Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by
combining GPS, Dead Reckoning, and map
matching. However, in some situations, these
functions may not work properly, and the error
may become bigger.

! If a car phone or cellular phone is used
near the GPS antenna, GPS reception may
be lost temporarily.

193

Appendix

Appendix
! Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray
paint or car wax, because this may block
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup
can also degrade the signals, so keep the
antenna clear.
p If, for any reason, GPS signals cannot be received, learning and error correction are
not possible. If GPS positioning has been
operating for only a short time, your vehicle’s actual position and the current location mark on the map may diverge
considerably. Once GPS reception is restored, accuracy will be recovered.

! If there is a parallel road.

! If there is another road very nearby, such
as in the case of an elevated freeway.

Vehicles that Cannot
Obtain Speed Pulse Data
p The speed pulse data comes from the
speed sensing circuit. The location of this
speed sensing circuit depends on your vehicle model. In some cases, it is impossible
to make a connection to it, and in such a
case we recommend that ND-PG1 speed
pulse generator (sold separately) be
used.

Conditions Likely to Cause
Noticeable Positioning Errors
For various reasons such as the state of the
road you are traveling on and the state of reception of the GPS signal, the actual position
of your vehicle may differ from the position
displayed on the map screen.
! If you make a shallow turn.

194

! If you take a recently opened road that is
not on the map.

Appendix

Appendix
! If you drive in zig-zags.

! If you are driving on a long, straight road or
a gently curving road.

! If the road has connected hairpin bends.

Appendix

! If you are on a steep mountain road with
many height changes.

! If there is a loop or similar road configuration.
! If you enter or exit a multi-storey parking lot
or similar using a spiral ramp.

! If you take a ferry.

195

Appendix

Appendix
! If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or similar structure.

! If your vehicle’s wheels spin, such as on a
gravel road or in snow.

! If you drive very slowly, or in a start-andstop manner, as in a traffic congestion.

! If you join the road after driving around a
large parking lot.

! When you pass around a traffic circle.
! If you put on chains, or change your tires
for ones with a different size.

! If trees or other obstacles block the GPS
signals for a considerable period.

! When starting driving immediately after
starting the engine.
! If you turn your navigation system on while
driving.

Some types of vehicles may not output a
speed signal while driving at just a few kilometers per hour. In such a case, the current location of your vehicle may not be displayed
correctly while in a traffic congestion or in a
parking lot.

196

Appendix

Appendix
When the Hard Disk Drive is
Disconnected
If there is no hard disk drive because of repair
or service, you can operate only the Radio
source without the hard disk drive.
The following screen also may appear because
the hard disk drive can not run due to low temperature. In such a case, park your vehicle in a
safe place and turn the ignition switch off.
After the temperature inside the vehicle returns to normal, turn the ignition switch on.

Route Setting Information
Route search specifications
Your navigation system sets a route to your
destination by applying certain built-in rules to
the map data. This section provides some useful information about how a route is set.

! The calculated route is one example of the
route to your destination decided by the navigation system whilst taking the type of
streets or traffic regulations into account. It
is not necessarily an optimum route. (In
some cases, you may not be able to set the
streets you want to pass. If you need to
pass a certain street, set the waypoint on
that street.)
! The route set by your navigation system
may not use the streets known to local drivers, such as small streets or special roads.
! Some route options may become the same
route. If waypoints are set, only one route is
calculated.
! If the destination is too far, there may be instances where the route cannot be set. (If
you want to set a long-distance route going
across several areas, set waypoints along
the way.)
! During voice guidance, turns and intersections from the freeway are announced.
However, if you pass intersections, turns,
and other guide points in rapid succession,
some may not be announced.
! It is possible that guidance may direct you
off a freeway and then back on again.

Appendix

Only the following operations are available.
Other functions cannot be operated.
! Only the FM and AM sources can be operated. (Preset station select cannot be operated.)
! If the selected source before ejecting the
hard disk drive is [AV], the [AV INPUT]
source is available on “Rear display”. (If the
selected source is [DVD], nothing is output
to “Rear display”. If the selected source is
[MIRROR], the same image as “Front display” is output to “Rear display”.)
! Rear view camera is available only when
the vehicle is backing up. ([Rear View] is
not available.)

CAUTION
When a route is calculated, the route and voice
guidance for the route is automatically set. Also,
for day or time traffic regulations, only information about traffic regulations at the time when the
route was calculated is shown. One-way streets
and street closures may not be taken into consideration. For example, if a street is open during the
morning only, but you arrive later, it would be
against the traffic regulations so you cannot drive
along the set route. When driving, please follow
the actual traffic signs. Also, the system may not
know some traffic regulations.

197

Appendix

Appendix
! In some cases, the route may require you
to travel in the opposite direction to your
current heading. In such cases, you are instructed to turn around, so please turn
around safely by following the actual traffic
rules.
! In some cases, guidance may direct you
past your destination and then indicate a
U-turn to get back to it.
! In some cases, a route may begin on the
opposite side of a railway or river from your
actual current location. If this happens,
drive towards your destination for a while,
and try route calculation again.
! When there is a traffic congestion or closure ahead, if driving through the traffic
congestion or closure is better than taking
the detour, a detour route may not appear.
! There may be instances when the starting
point and the destination point are not on
the highlighted route.
! The number of traffic circle exits displayed
on the screen may differ from the actual
number of roads.
Auto Reroute
! Auto Reroute is used when you deviate
more than 0.02 mile (Approx. 30 m) from
the route.
! The Auto Reroute function does not work in
the following cases:
— when your vehicle is not on a street
— when you are too close to your destination
— when your vehicle is on a ferry
— when driving on a road inside a facility
— when driving on a traffic circle
— when driving on the routes are described in “Route highlighting”
! The system assumes the driver deviated
either intentionally or inadvertently from
the route and searches for another route
(intelligent rerouting). Depending on the situation, the system may search a new route
that does not return to the original one.

198

Route highlighting
! Once set, the route is highlighted in bright
green or light blue on the map.
! The immediate vicinity of your starting
point and destination may not be highlighted, and neither will areas with particularly complex road layouts. Consequently,
the route may appear to be cut off on the
display, but voice guidance will continue.
Roads not used in calculations
Even though displayed on screen, the following roads are not included in route calculations.
! Walkways
! Public vehicle only
! Non access road
= For details, refer to Viewing the Map Color Legend on page 49

Tracking
! Your navigation system marks your course
on the map in certain increments. This is
called tracking. It is handy when you want
to check a route traveled without guidance
or if returning along a complex route.
! A maximum of about 155 miles (250 km) is
marked and, as you travel beyond this limit,
tracking marks are erased in order from the
most distant. Tracking display shows about
100 miles (160 km) tracking of your vehicle
with white dots.
= For more details about “Tracking can also
be set for automatic erasing whenever the navigation system is switched off”, refer to Setting the Item on the Map Screen on page 46

Displaying POI
Points of Interest (POI) that can be displayed
on the enlarged map of the intersection or
[Driver’s View] (left screen) are only the special Points of Interest (POI) that contain the
position information. Not all of Points of Interests (POI) are displayed.

Appendix

Appendix
Detail Information for
Playable Media
DVD discs and other DVD media
types

About playing DualDisc
! DualDiscs are two-sided discs that have a
recordable CD for audio on one side and a
recordable DVD for video on the other.
! Playback of the DVD side is possible with
this unit. However, since the CD side of
DualDiscs is not physically compatible with
the general CD standard, it may not be possible to play the CD side with this navigation system.

CD-R/CD-RW discs
! When CD-R/CD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs that have
been finalized.
! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/
CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of
disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on
the disc, or dirt, scratches or condensation
on the lens of this product.
! Playback of discs recorded on a personal
computer may not be possible, depending
on the environment and the application settings. Please record with the correct format. (For details, contact the manufacturer
of the application.)
! Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may become impossible with direct exposure to
sunlight, high temperatures, or depending
on the storage conditions in the vehicle.
! Titles and other text information recorded
on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be displayed by this product (in the case of audio
data (CD-DA)).
! If you insert a CD-RW disc into this product, it will take more time to play back
than when you insert a conventional CD or
CD-R disc.
! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW
discs before using them.

Appendix

! It may not be possible to use certain functions with some DVD-Video discs.
! It may not be possible to play back some
DVD video discs.
! When DVD-R/DVD-RW discs are used,
playback is possible only for discs that
have been finalized.
! When DVD-R/DVD-RW discs are used,
playback is possible only for discs that
have been recorded in Video format (video
mode). It is not possible to play back DVDR/-RW discs which have been recorded in
Video Recording format (VR mode).
! It may not be possible to play back DVD-R/
DVD-RW discs that have been recorded in
Video format (video mode) because of disc
characteristics, scratches or dirt on the
disc, or dirt, scratches or condensation on
the lens of this product.
! It is not possible to play back general DVDROM discs or DVD-RAM discs. Only DVDROM discs authorized by Pioneer can be
read.
! Playback of discs recorded on a personal
computer may not be possible depending
on the environment and the application settings. Please record with the correct format. (For details, contact the manufacturer
of the application.)

! Frequent loading and ejecting of a DualDisc may result in scratches on the disc.
! Serious scratches can lead to playback problems on this navigation system. In some
cases, a DualDisc may become stuck in
the disc loading slot and will not eject. To
prevent this, we recommend you refrain
from using DualDisc with this navigation
system.
! Please refer to the manufacturer for more
detailed information about DualDiscs.

199

Appendix

Appendix
MP3 files
! When naming an MP3 file, add the corresponding filename extension (.mp3).
! This navigation system plays back files with
the filename extension (.mp3) as MP3 files.
To prevent noise and malfunctions, do not
use this extension for files other than MP3
files.
! MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 and
refers to an audio compression technology
standard.
! This product allows playback of MP3 files
on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW discs. Recorded discs can be played back if they are
compatible with level 1 and level 2 of
ISO9660 and with the Romeo and Joliet file
system.
! It is possible to play back multi-session
compatible recorded discs.
! MP3 files are not compatible with packet
write data transfer.
! The maximum number of characters for
the file and folder name is 32 characters,
including extension (.mp3). However the
navigation system uses proportional font.
Therefore, the number of the characters
that you can display varies according to the
width of each character.
! When playing discs with both MP3 files
and audio data (CD-DA), such as CDEXTRA and MIXED-MODE CDs, both types
can be played only by switching the mode
between MP3 and CD-DA.
! The folder selection sequence for playback
and other operations is the writing sequence used by the writing software. For
this reason, the expected sequence at the
time of playback may not coincide with the
actual playback sequence. However, there
also are some writing software that permit
the setting of the playback order.
! Some audio CDs contain tracks that merge
into one another without a pause. When
these discs are converted to MP3 files and
burned to a CD-R/CD-RW/CD-ROM, the
files will be played back on this player with

200

!
!
!

a short pause between each one, regardless of the length of the pause between
tracks on the original audio CD.
Files are compatible with the ID3 Tag Ver.
1.0 and Ver. 1.1 formats for displaying
album (disc title), track (track title) and artist (track artist).
The emphasis function is valid only when
MP3 files of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz frequencies are played back. (16 kHz,
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
sampling frequencies can be played back.)
There is no m3u playlist compatibility.
There is no compatibility with the MP3i
(MP3 interactive) or MP3 PRO formats.
The sound quality of MP3 files generally improves with an increased bit rate. This product can play recordings with bit rates
from 8 kbps to 320 kbps, but in order to be
able to enjoy sound of a certain quality, we
recommend only using discs recorded with
a bit rate of at least 128 kbps.
Playing MP3 file on the DVD-R (-RW) is not
supported.

About folders and MP3 files
An outline of a CD-ROM with MP3 files on it is
shown below. Subfolders are shown as folders
in the folder currently selected.
p The following figure is an example of the
tier structure in the CD. The numbers in the
figure indicate the order in which folder
numbers are assigned and the order to be
played back.
Indicates the order in which folder numbers are assigned.

Appendix

Appendix
Indicates each file. The number is assigned
in the order of the track to be played back.

Appendix

1 First tier
2 Second tier
3 Third tier
Notes
! This product assigns folder numbers. The user
can not assign folder numbers.
! If you are using a folder that does not contain
an MP3 file, the folder itself will display but
you will not be able to see any files in the
folder.
! MP3 files in up to 8 tiers of folders can be
played back. However, there is a delay when
starting playback on discs with numerous
tiers. For this reason we recommend creating
discs with no more than 2 tiers.
! It is possible to play back up to 253 folders on
one disc.

201

Appendix

Appendix
Display Information

Dial

Navigation menu

Phone Book

82, 84

[Destination] menu

Dial Favorites

82, 84

Read Bus. Card

Dialed Numbers

81, 86

Received Calls

81, 86

Phone Settings

Stock Info

Set My Favorites

Page

My Favorites

Address Search

Emergency Info

Return Home

55, 58

XM Status

Go to

55, 58

POI Search

Route Overview

Address Book

56, 58

Destination History

56, 64

Telephone Search

Vicinity Search

Cancel Route

Page
Displayed Info

[Information] menu

Close Up View

City Map

Tracking Display

Show Mute Button

Show Traffic Incident

Second Maneuver Arrow

Page

Bluetooth Connected

Traffic On Route

Address Book Icon

Traffic Events

3D Landmark

Traffic Flow

Short-Cut Selection

Traffic Settings

Overlay POI

Map Legend

View Mode

Day/Night Display

Phone Menu

202

[Map] menu

Appendix

Appendix
AV Guide Mode

Road Color

[Settings] menu

Shortcut menu
p The shortcuts displayed on screen can be
customized.
p Items marked with an asterisk (*3) cannot
be removed from Shortcut menu.
= For details, refer to Selecting the Shortcut on
page 48
Shortcut menu
Page
: Destination*

Volume

Regional Settings

: Route Options*
Route Condition

Avoid Toll Road

34
34

Language

Avoid Ferry

Time

Avoid Freeway

Keyboard

Time restrictions

km / mile

Learning Route

Average Speed

Hardware

: Registration

: Vicinity Search

54
49

Appendix

Page

Connection Status

: Overlay POI

3D Calibration Status

: Volume

Installation Angle Setup

: Phone Book

82, 84

Service Info Screen

: Dial Favorite 1 to 5

82, 84

: Whole Route Overview

: Stock Info

Background Picture Setting

: Set My Favorites

Demo Mode

: My Favorites

Modify Current Location

: Traffic On Route

Restore Factory Settings

: Traffic Events

: Day/Night Display

: Address Book Icon Display

Hard Disk Info
Defined Locations

203

Appendix

Appendix
Menu in the Audio Screen

Rear SP

152

[Audio Settings] menu

5.1Ch Setup

152

Page
Equalizer

142

Staging

142

FAD/BAL

142

Sub Woofer

145

Loudness

145

HPF

146

Source Level

146

[System Settings] menu

Page

204

DVD-V Setup

147

Wide Mode

149

Camera Input

149

AV Input

150

AUX Input

150

Mute Set

150

Mute Level

151

Guide/Tel SP

151

Auto ANT

151

Clock DISP

151

REC Mode

152

Appendix

Appendix
Glossary
3D Hybrid sensor
The built-in sensor which enables the system
to estimate your vehicle’s position. A learning
function increases its accuracy and its learning data can be stored in memory.

Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio
from up to 5.1 independent channels. This is
the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound
system used in theaters.

Address Book
A list of locations registered manually.

Bit rate
This expresses data volume per second, or bps
units (bits per second). The higher the rate,
the more information is available to reproduce
the sound. Using the same encoding method
(such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better
the sound.
Chapter
DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters
which are numbered in the same way as the
chapters of a book. With DVD-Video discs featuring chapters, you can quickly find a desired
scene with chapter search.
Current location
The present location of your vehicle; your current location is shown on the map by a red triangle mark.

Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
DTS
This stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is
a surround system delivering multi-channel
audio from up to 6 independent channels.

Appendix

Aspect ratio
This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen.
A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3.
Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of
16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional
presence and atmosphere.

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Favorite location
A frequently visited location (such as your
workplace or a relative’s home) that you can
register to allow easy routing.
GPS
Global Positioning System. A network of satellites that provides navigation signals for a variety of purposes.

Default setting
A factory setting which applies when you first
switch on the system; you can customize default settings to suit your own needs in the
menu.
Destination
A location you choose as the end point of your
journey.

205

Appendix

Appendix
Gracenote® Music recognition service
Music recognition technology and related
data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is
the industry standard in music recognition
technology and related content delivery. For
more information visit www.gracenote.com.

Guidance mode
The mode in which guidance is given as you
drive to your destination; the system automatically switches to this mode as soon as a route
has been set.
Guidance point
These are important landmarks along your
route, generally intersections. The next guidance point along your route is indicated on
the map by the yellow flag icon.
Home location
Your registered home location.
ID3 tag
This is a method of embedding track-related
information in a MP3 file. This embedded information can include the track title, the artist’s name, the album title, the music genre,
the year of production, comments and other
data. The contents can be freely edited using
software with ID3 Tag editing functions.
Although the tags are restricted to the number
of characters, the information can be viewed
when the track is played back.
ISO9660 format
This is the international standard for the format logic of DVD/CD-ROM folders and files.
For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations
for the following two levels:
Level 1:
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name consists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English

206

capital letters, half-byte numerals and the “_”
sign, with a file-extension of three characters).
Level 2:
The file name can have up to 31 characters (including the separation mark “.” and a file extension). Each folder contains less than 8
hierarchies.
Extended formats
Joliet:
File names can have up to 64 characters.
Romeo:
File names can have up to 128 characters.
Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code
modulation
This stands for linear pulse code modulation,
which is the signal recording system used for
music CDs and DVDs. Generally, DVDs are recorded with higher sampling frequency and
bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can provide
higher sound quality.
m3u
Playlists created using the “WINAMP” software have a playlist file extension (.m3u).
Menu
A list of options shown on the display; choices
are selected touching the display.
MP3
MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an
audio compression standard set by a working
group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Standards Organization). MP3 is able to compress
audio data to about 1/10th the size of a conventional disc.
MPEG
This stands for Moving Pictures Experts
Group, and is an international video image
compression standard. Some DVDs feature digital audio compressed and recorded using
this system.

Appendix

Appendix
Multi-angle
With regular TV programs, although multiple
cameras are used to simultaneously shoot
scenes, only images from one camera at a
time are transmitted to your TV. Some DVDs
feature scenes shot from multiple angles, letting you choose your viewing angle as desired.

children will be disabled, or these scenes will
be skipped.

Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog)
Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multiple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languages
can be recorded on a single disc, letting you
choose as desired.

Region number
DVD players and DVD discs feature region
numbers indicating the area in which they
were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not possible unless it features the same region number as the DVD player. The navigation system’s
region number is displayed on the bottom of
the navigation unit.
Route setting
The process of determining the ideal route to a
specific location; route setting is done automatically by the system when you specify a
destination.

Multi-subtitle
Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be recorded on a single DVD, letting you choose as
desired.

Set route
The route marked out by the system to your
destination. It is highlighted in bright green on
the map.

Optical digital output
By transmitting audio signals in a digital signal format, the chance of sonic quality deteriorating in the course of transmission is
minimized. An optical digital output is designed to transmit digital signals optically.

Title
DVD-Video discs have a high data capacity, enabling recording of multiple movies on a single disc. If, for example, one disc contains
three separate movies, they are divided into
title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the
convenience of title search and other functions.

Packet write
This is a general term for a method of writing
on CD-R, etc. at the time required for a file,
just as is done with files on floppy or hard
discs.
Parental lock
Some DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-oriented scenes feature parental lock which prevents children from viewing such scenes. With
this kind of disc, if you set the unit’s parental
lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for

Appendix

Multi-session
Multi-session is a recording method that allows additional data to be recorded later.
When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or
CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is
treated as a single unit or session. Multi-session is a method of recording more than 2 sessions in one disc.

Point of Interest (POI)
Point Of Interest; any of a range of locations
stored in the data, such as railway stations,
shops, restaurants, and amusement parks.

Tracking
Marks on the map indicating the route you
have traveled.
TV system (NTSC, PAL, SECAM)
Different areas of the world use different TV
systems. North America uses NTSC, Europe
uses PAL and SECAM, and South America
uses PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL and NTSC.

207

Appendix

Appendix
Almost all are incompatible with each other.
To display the video image, such as TV or DVDvideo correctly, you may need to coordinate
your system at the same TV system or use a
multi-system equipment.
VBR
VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally
speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more
widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit
rate according to the needs of audio compression, it is possible to achieve compression
priority sound quality.
Voice guidance
The giving of directions by a recorded voice
while in guidance mode.
Voice recognition
The technology that allows the system to understand the driver’s voice commands.
Waypoint
A location that you choose to visit before your
destination; a journey can be built up from
multiple way points and the destination.

208

Index
0-9
3D hybrid mode ............................................192
3D Hybrid Sensor ..........................................192
3D Landmark ...................................................47
3D POI ..............................................................39
A
Active touch panel key ...................................28
Address Book ............................................60,.82
Address Search ...............................................28
Album group .................................................113
Artist group ....................................................113
Audio operation ..............................................97
Auto antenna .................................................151
Auto fill-in function .........................................30
Auto reroute .....................................................23
Auto Reroute .................................................198
AUX input ......................................................141
AV Guide Mode ...............................................50
AV Input .........................................................139
AV Settings menu ...........................................99
Average Speed ................................................90
B
Background Picture ........................................93
Backlight ........................................................154
Bluetooth unit .................................................77
BSM ................................................................109
BSSM ..............................................................138
Business card ..................................................83
C
Cancel Route ...................................................33
CD-R (-RW) ................................................85,.94
CD-R(-RW) ........................................................93
CD-TEXT ..................................................100,.110
Contacts ...........................................................83
Current location ..............................................33
D
Dead reckoning .............................................192
Default or Factory Settings ..........................187
Demo Mode .....................................................95
Destination History .........................................64
Dialed number history ...................................81
Direct scale key ...............................................43
Distance study .................................................92
Dolby Digital ..................................................205

DTS .................................................................205
E
Enlarged map of the intersection .................40
Equalizer .........................................................142
Estimated time of arrival ................................42
External Unit ..................................................139
F
Favorite location ..............................................58
Frame-by-frame playback .............................105
Front display ..................................................197
Front Display ....................................................10
G
Genre group ...................................................113
GPS .................................................................191
Gracenote® Database ................................100,.110,.111,.113,.122
Guidance point ................................................41
H
Hands-free phoning ........................................86
Hands-free Phoning .......................................77
Hard Disk Drive .......................................24,.197
Hard disk recording ......................................100
Heading up ......................................................41
High pass filter ..............................................146
Home location .................................................58
I
ID3 tag ....................................................103,.206
Inactive touch panel key ................................28
Incoming call ...................................................80
Installation angle ............................................92
IPod .................................................................134
ISO9660 format .............................................206
J
Joliet ...............................................................206
JPEG .................................................................95
K
Keyboard ....................................................30,.89
L
Language .................................................88,.147
Learning Route ................................................35
En

209

Index
Learning Status ...............................................91
Linear PCM ....................................................206
Location confirmation screen .......................31
M
M3u .................................................................206
Map Legend .....................................................49
Map matching ...............................................193
Map Mode ........................................................38
Mode1 ...............................................................95
MPEG ..............................................................206
Multi Angle ....................................................147
Multiple routes ................................................32
Multi-session .................................................207
Music Library .........................................110,.112
MUTE lead .............................................150,.151
Muting/attenuation ...............................150,.151
My Favorite group .........................................113
My Mix ............................................................116
N
North up ...........................................................42
Notification icon ..............................................68
P
Packet write ...................................................207
Parental lock ..........................................148,.207
Parking brake interlock ..................................22
Phone book ......................................................83
Phone Menu ....................................................77
Picture adjustment .......................................153
Playlist ....................................................113,.159
POI ........................................23,.51,.53,.158,.198
Profile for the Bluetooth unit ........................77
Q
Q ......................................................................143
R
Rear display ...................................................153
Rear Display ....................................................10
Rear view camera ...................................22,.149
Received call history ......................................81
Region number .............................................207
Roads without turn-by-turn instructions ......43
Romeo ............................................................206
Route calculation condition ..........................32
Route Calculation Conditions .......................34

210

Route confirmation screen ............................32
S
Scroll mode .....................................................43
Second Maneuver Arrow ...............................47
Simple hybrid mode .............................179,.192
Simulated sound stage ................................144
Single-session ..................................................95
Slow-motion playback ..................................105
Source ..............................................................97
Speed Pulse .......................................90,.91,.194
Speed pulse generator .........................192,.194
Splash Screen ...........................................93,.95
Steering Remote Control .................78,.98,.156
Street list screen .............................................31
Street name or city name input screen .......29
Stylus ..............................................................191
Subwoofer ..............................................145,.152
T
Text box .............................................................30
Time difference ................................................89
Time restrictions .............................................35
Touch Panel Calibration ...............................190
Tracking ..........................................................198
Tracking Display ..............................................46
Travel time ........................................................42
TV system .......................................................207
U
Unit of distance and speed ...........................89
V
VBR .........................................................104,.208
Vehicle Dynamics Display .............................76
Video image .....................................................10
View mode .......................................................38
Voice Commands ..........................................159
Voice Help menu ..........................................157
Voice Operation .............................................156
Volume ..............................................................88
W
Waypoint ..........................................................41
Waypoints ........................................................36
Wide screen mode ........................................149

PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU
TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.
TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium
TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936
TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia
TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada
TEL: 1-877-283-5901
TEL: 905-479-4411
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso
Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000
TEL:55-9178-4270
先鋒股份有限公司
總公司 : 台北市中山北路二段44號13樓
電話 : (02) 2521-3588
先鋒電子（香港）有限公司
香港九龍尖沙咀海港城世界商業中心9樓901-6室
電話 : (0852) 2848-6488

Printed in China

<08A00000>

UC}}

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Count                      : 211
Page Mode                       : UseThumbs
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-14, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:0f2005e5-bd5a-4ddd-bc58-0d371d92a673
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2008:01:12 19:26:24+09:00
Modify Date                     : 2008:02:08 19:13:49+09:00
Metadata Date                   : 2008:02:08 19:13:49+09:00
Creator Tool                    : 3B2 Total Publishing System 8.07v/W Unicode
Document ID                     : uuid:adbc83e0-01ae-412d-8d1d-2fdf2d9fb3ee
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : CRB2619-AU
Description                     : Linked
Creator                         : PMC
Author                          : PMC
Subject                         : Linked

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Pioneer CRB2619 AU If Not Then AVIC Z3 Operation Manual0218

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation